佛說觀無量壽佛經 義疏通講

18 單元 · 各段末可入全文五層

御製無量壽佛贊、題名署譯及序分(禁父緣起)00 The Imperially Composed Praise of the Buddha of Measureless Life; Title, Attribution, and the Introduction (the Imprisonment of the Father)

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

《觀無量壽佛經》的第一句正文是「如是我聞」,第二句就把人帶進王舍城的宮牆裡:兒子囚禁父親,又拔劍要殺母親。一部要教人專心繫念、觀想西方的經,開場是一場血親相殘。

這一段有多長,歷來的讀法並不一致。善導《觀經四帖疏》把它整個判作序分,一直算到韋提希問「云何當見阿彌陀佛極樂世界」為止,正宗分要等到日想觀才開始;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》則把序分斷在「清淨業處」,佛放眉間光以下已是正說。本篇的分段從前者。兩家所判的界不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡,此處並存,不作調停。

至於卷端那一篇〈御製無量壽佛贊〉,不是經文本身——它在經題之前,兩家的注疏也都不釋它一字;照錄存之,此下所講的是經。

序,不只是開場白

多數經典的序分,是報時、報地、報人:一時、佛在某處、與大眾若干人俱。《觀無量壽佛經》的序分也有這三樣,但只用了兩行——王舍城耆闍崛山,大比丘一千二百五十人,菩薩三萬二千人,文殊師利為上首。

然後經文立刻轉向宮城。

「爾時王舍大城有一太子,名阿闍世,隨順調達惡友之教,收執父王頻婆娑羅」——從這一句起,一直到夫人請佛、佛放光現國、佛開三福,全都還在序分之內。也就是說,這部經的「序」,佔了全經將近三分之一。

序這麼長,是因為它不只在交代時地人,它在交代為什麼要說這部經

古來注家把這一長段拆成七節:化前序、禁父緣、禁母緣、厭苦緣、欣淨緣、散善顯行緣、定善示觀緣。七節之中,五節在說一件事——一個人是怎麼被逼到非求出離不可的地步。

兒子、父親、母親,和一把劍

阿闍世收捕父王,「幽閉置於七重室內,制諸群臣,一不得往」。

七重,是為了斷絕一切通路;下令群臣一個都不准去,是為了斷絕一切人情。經文用兩個動作寫這件事:忽然掩住王身叫做「收」,既已抓住不放叫做「執」。

母親韋提希去了。她「澡浴清淨,以酥蜜和麨,用塗其身,諸瓔珞中盛葡萄漿,密以上王」——先沐浴乾淨,把酥和蜜塗在身上,再把乾的炒麥粉敷在酥蜜之上,然後穿好衣服、戴上瓔珞,瓔珞的珠孔裡灌滿葡萄漿,一頭用蠟封住。看上去只是尋常的盛裝。

大王見了,就從她身上把酥與粉刮下來,團成一團吃了。

這是一個母親能想到的全部辦法。經文寫得極細——細到讀的人幾乎能看見那個把食物塗在自己身上、再一層層穿好衣服的動作。

守門的人看見了,也說了。太子聽完,罵母親是賊——「我母是賊,與賊為伴」——隨即「執利劍欲害其母」。

罵母親是賊,是因為她偷偷送了糧,使父親不死。這句話裡有一個很冷的邏輯:在他眼裡,讓人活著也是一種盜竊。

兩位大臣按著劍退出去

攔下這一劍的,不是佛,是兩位大臣。

月光與耆婆先向大王行禮——要諫大人,必先設拜以表身敬——然後才開口。月光引的不是佛法,是外道所傳的古書史記:從劫初以來,貪國位而殺父的惡王有一萬八千人,「未曾聞有無道害母」。

這句話很值得看清楚。他沒有說殺父是對的。他說的是:連那一萬八千個惡王,都沒有做到這一步。

接著他說「污剎利種」——剎利是四姓中最高的一等,是王者之種;而現在的行徑,是四姓中最下一流的行徑。最後他說:「我等不宜復住於此。」

說完,「以手按劍,却行而退」。

按著劍,是防身;倒退著走,是不敢轉身。這兩個動作合起來,把當時殿上的空氣寫盡了。

阿闍世驚怖惶懼,問耆婆:「汝不為我耶?」耆婆只回了一句:「大王!慎莫害母。」

劍就放下了。

她說的第一句話,不是求救

母親沒有被殺,卻被「閉置深宮,不令復出」。

她做的第一件事,是遙向耆闍崛山禮佛。她說的第一句話,也不是求救,而是:「如來世尊在昔之時,恒遣阿難來慰問我;我今愁憂,世尊威重,無由得見」。

從前有人來看我,現在沒有了——她開口先說的是這個。

然後佛來了。經文寫得很奇特:目連與阿難從空而來,佛卻是「從耆闍崛山沒,於王宮出」。此處不現身而來,那裡直接出現——因為宮中的禁約太嚴,若讓人看見佛從外面進來,只怕又要生出留難。

韋提希抬頭見佛,「自絕瓔珞,舉身投地,號泣向佛」。

那串瓔珞,正是前幾天用來藏葡萄漿的東西。此刻她親手扯斷了它。平日她的衣服首飾都由旁人伺候,如今見佛,羞慚之下,連鉤帶都不解就直接扯下來。

她問了兩個問題:「我宿何罪,生此惡子?」「世尊復有何等因緣,與提婆達多共為眷屬?」

第一個問題問自己,第二個問題問佛。她的意思很清楚:連佛都會有一個提婆達多,那我為什麼會有一個阿闍世?

經文對第一個問題沒有正面回答。

從『我不要這裡』到『我要那裡』

真正的轉折在下一句:「唯願世尊,為我廣說無憂惱處,我當往生,不樂閻浮提濁惡世也。」

她不再問為什麼,她開始問去哪裡。

而她要離開的,不只是這座宮殿。經文接著說:「此濁惡處,地獄、餓鬼、畜生盈滿,多不善聚。願我未來不聞惡聲,不見惡人。」

閻浮提整個是惡的,沒有一處可貪——她要捨的是整個世間。這是被一個親生兒子逼出來的結論:連親生的兒子都能對父母動殺心,何況不相干的人。所以她不分親疏,一併都捨。

然後是四個字:「求哀懺悔。」

要去一個清淨的地方,自己身上的舊債得先認。她沒有等佛提醒。

最後才是那句請法:「唯願佛日教我觀於清淨業處。」

「佛日」二字是法與喻並舉——太陽一出,眾闇盡除;佛的智慧一照,無明的長夜就亮了。她求的不是一個地方的名字,是到那裡去的辦法。

光臺上的無量國土

佛沒有直接回答。佛放眉間光,光化為金臺,十方諸佛的淨土全在裡面現出來。

有的國土七寶合成,有的純是蓮花,有的像自在天宮,有的像頗梨鏡。經文一一列出,然後說「令韋提希見」。

為什麼不直接說一個,要通通現出來?

因為若只是說給她聽,她看不見,心裡還是會有疑。所以一一顯現,擺在眼前,讓她自己看、自己挑。

她挑了:「我今樂生極樂世界阿彌陀佛所。」

這一句是她自己說的。佛現了十方國土,卻沒有指定哪一個——而她選的那一個,正是佛後面要說的那一個。

佛先說的,不是觀

選定之後,她請的是行法:「教我思惟,教我正受。」

而佛開口先說的,卻不是觀,是三福。

「一者、孝養父母,奉事師長,慈心不殺,修十善業。二者、受持三歸,具足眾戒,不犯威儀。三者、發菩提心,深信因果,讀誦大乘,勸進行者。」

這件事的次第值得停一下。眾生的根機有兩種:一種能定,一種散動;若只講定的一路,就有一大批人接不住。所以先把三福開出來,讓散動的人也有路可走。

而三福的第一條,是孝養父母。

在這一部由弒父囚母發起的經裡,佛開口說的第一件善事是孝養父母——經文沒有點破這個對照,它只是照著次第說下去。父母是世間福田中最極的,佛是出世福田中最極的;一個人若連世間最極的福田都不認,別的話就無從說起。

三福說完,佛加了一句:「此三種業,乃是過去、未來、現在三世諸佛淨業正因。」

不是為這一時、這一人說的權宜之計。

「汝是凡夫」

序分的最後一節,佛正式勅聽許說:「諦聽,諦聽!善思念之。」——諦聽是為了生聞慧,善思是思慧,念之是修慧。

接著佛說明所以能見的緣故:「以佛力故,當得見彼清淨國土,如執明鏡自見面像。」

拿鏡子照自己的臉,是最不費力的一種看見。而經文在此之前先說了「以佛力故」四個字。

然後佛對韋提希說了一句很重的話:「汝是凡夫,心想羸劣,未得天眼,不能遠觀」。

這句話是說給誰聽的?

若你以為韋提希本是聖者、本是大菩薩,只是示現,那麼這一部經就與你無關了——聖者能作的觀,我們作不來。所以經文在此直接把她定為凡夫:心想羸劣,眼力不及,看不了那麼遠。凡夫看不見,靠的是「諸佛如來有異方便」。

古來注家於此有兩種讀法:一說她確是凡夫,佛此語正為斷除後人『她是聖者所以能』的疑;一說她實是大菩薩而示同凡夫。兩說都在,此處並存不判。

而經文自己說的是那四個字。

最後一問,是替後來的人問的

序分收在韋提希的最後一問:

「如我今者,以佛力故見彼國土。若佛滅後,諸眾生等,濁惡不善,五苦所逼,云何當見阿彌陀佛極樂世界?」

她已經見到了。她問的是佛滅度以後的人怎麼辦。

五濁裡的劫濁,並不是劫本身濁,而是劫在減的時候諸惡加增;見濁是把自己的惡全看成善、把別人的一切都看成不是;五苦是生苦、老苦、病苦、死苦、愛別苦。

一個剛剛從刀口下活下來、剛剛親眼見過十方淨土的人,回頭問的是:那些沒有佛在世、又被這些逼著的人,要怎麼看見?她問的那批人裡,有我們。

序分到這裡結束。下一句,佛就開始教日想觀。

整部經之所以要用這麼長的一段作序,答案就在這一問裡:它先讓人看見一個人是怎麼走投無路的,再讓人看見那條路是為誰開的。

承衍——兩副眼,兩種序

上來是這一長段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一段王宮之事,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把序分判到「云何見極樂世界」為止,正宗分自日觀始,並且明說自己這個判法「與諸師不同」——在他看來,日觀以上雖有多義,「看此文勢,但是由序也」。序分之內他分七緣,逐句坐實於事:「收」與「執」的訓詁、瓔珞盛漿的手法、按劍却行的緣由、闍王問「猶存在耶」而不直問死的心思,一一有解。他讀韋提希,是凡夫;讀阿闍世,是就事而責。而他讀全經之宗,是「今此《觀經》即以觀佛三昧為宗,亦以念佛三昧為宗。一心迴願往生淨土為體。」;讀這部經的位置,是釋迦在此方發遣、彌陀在彼國來迎,「彼喚此遣,豈容不去也」。他還在這部經裡分出「要門」與「弘願」兩層:要門是本經的定散二門,弘願則是「一切善惡凡夫得生者,莫不皆乘阿彌陀佛大願業力為增上緣」。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他判序分止於「清淨業處」,放光以下即入正說;全經之宗,他立為「心觀為宗、實相為體」,又說「以心觀淨則佛土淨,為經宗致」,並以四種淨土分判彼此。他讀發起序,直說「今經正以殺父以為發起」,而所以要舉這樁逆事,是「為彰此界極惡,令人厭棄」——親生的兒子尚且如此,才好教人同欣淨土。他讀阿闍世與提婆達多,判為「大士善權現化,行於非道通達佛道」;讀韋提希,判為「實大菩薩,此會即得無生忍,示同在凡夫」。他解名相尤詳:耆闍崛翻作靈鷲,調達此云天熱,耆婆此云固活,五體是兩肘兩膝頭頂,懺摩是梵言而悔過是漢語。

兩家所判的序分不同,所立的宗不同,讀闍王與韋提希也不同。一路把這段王宮之事讀成實事,一路把它讀成大士的權現;一路把經的宗落在念佛與迴願,一路落在心觀與實相。

而經自己不曾說哪一種讀法是對的。它只是照著次第,先寫一把劍,再寫一道光,最後寫一個問題。

The first sentence of the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life is “Thus have I heard.” The second sentence carries us inside the palace walls of Rājagṛha: a son imprisons his father, and then draws a sword to kill his mother. A sūtra that means to teach people to fix their thought single-mindedly and to contemplate the West opens with kindred blood turned against itself.

How far this opening passage extends has never been read in one way. Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles assigns the whole of it to the introduction, counting all the way to Vaidehī’s question, “How are they to see Amitābha Buddha and the world of Ultimate Bliss?”, so that the main body begins only at the contemplation of the sun. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life instead breaks off the introduction at “the place of pure karma,” so that everything from the Buddha’s sending forth the light between his brows already belongs to the main teaching. The segmentation followed here is the former. The two draw the boundary differently; the reasons of each stand in his own book; both are preserved here, and no reconciliation is attempted.

As for the Imperially Composed Praise of the Buddha of Measureless Life at the head of the fascicle, it is not the sūtra text itself. It stands before the title of the sūtra, and neither commentary explains one word of it. It is reproduced and preserved as it stands; what is discussed below is the sūtra.

The Introduction Is Not Merely an Opening

The introduction of most scriptures reports a time, a place, and a company: at one time, the Buddha was dwelling in such a place, together with so many people. The introduction of this sūtra has these three as well, but it uses only two lines for them — Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa at Rājagṛha, twelve hundred and fifty great bhikṣus, thirty-two thousand bodhisattvas, with Mañjuśrī as their leader.

And then the text turns at once to the palace city.

“At that time in the great city of Rājagṛha there was a prince named Ajātaśatru, who followed the instigation of that evil friend Diaoda and seized and held his father, King Bimbisāra.” From this sentence onward — through the lady’s entreaty of the Buddha, the Buddha’s sending forth light and revealing the lands, and the Buddha’s disclosure of the three kinds of merit — everything is still inside the introduction. Which is to say: the “introduction” of this sūtra takes up nearly a third of the whole.

An introduction this long is long because it is not merely reporting time, place, and persons. It is reporting why this sūtra had to be spoken.

The commentators of old divided this long stretch into seven parts: the introduction preceding the teaching, the cause of the imprisonment of the father, the cause of the imprisonment of the mother, the cause of weariness of suffering, the cause of delight in purity, the cause that discloses practice through the good done in a scattered mind, and the cause that shows contemplation through the good done in concentration. Of the seven, five are telling one single thing — how a person came to be driven to the point where nothing was left but to seek a way out.

A Son, a Father, a Mother, and a Sword

Ajātaśatru seized his father the king and “confined him within a chamber of seven walls, and issued orders to the ministers that not one of them should go to him.”

Seven walls, to cut off every passage; an order that not one minister may go, to cut off every human tie. The sūtra writes the deed with two actions: suddenly to seize upon the king’s person is called “taking”; having got him, not to let go is called “holding.”

The mother, Vaidehī, went. She “bathed and made her body clean, mixed butter and honey with parched flour and smeared it on her body, filled her many necklaces with grape juice, and secretly presented it to the king” — first washing herself clean, then putting butter and honey on her body, then setting the dry roasted barley meal upon the butter and honey, then dressing and putting on her necklaces, with the beads of the necklaces filled full of grape juice and sealed at one end with wax. To look at, it was only ordinary finery.

When the great king saw it, he scraped the butter and flour from her body, rolled it into a ball, and ate it.

This was every device a mother could think of. The sūtra writes it in the finest detail — fine enough that a reader can almost see the motion of smearing food on one’s own body and then putting on layer after layer of clothing.

The gatekeeper saw, and told. When the prince had heard it, he cursed his mother as a thief — “My mother is a thief, and the companion of thieves” — and at once “drew a sharp sword, wishing to kill his mother.”

He curses his mother as a thief because she secretly brought provisions and so kept his father from dying. There is a very cold logic in that sentence: in his eyes, to let a man live is itself a kind of stealing.

Two Ministers Withdraw with Their Hands on Their Swords

What stopped that sword was not the Buddha. It was two ministers.

Moonlight and Jīvaka first paid homage to the great king — one who would remonstrate with a great man must first bow, to show that the person is honoured — and only then spoke. What Moonlight cited was not the Buddha-Dharma but the old books and histories transmitted in the non-Buddhist tradition: since the beginning of the aeon, evil kings who killed their fathers out of greed for the throne have numbered eighteen thousand, but “it has never been heard that anyone was so lawless as to kill his mother.”

That sentence is worth seeing clearly. He did not say that killing a father was right. He said: even those eighteen thousand evil kings never went this far.

Then he said that it “defiles the kṣatriya lineage” — the kṣatriya being the highest of the four castes, the lineage of kings; while the present conduct is the conduct of the lowest stream of the four castes. And at the last he said, “It is not fitting that we should dwell here any longer.”

Having spoken, they “laid their hands upon their swords and withdrew, walking backward.”

A hand on the sword is for defence; walking backward is not daring to turn one’s back. Those two motions together put down the whole air of that hall.

Ajātaśatru was startled and afraid, and asked Jīvaka, “Will you not stand by me?” Jīvaka answered with a single sentence: “Great king! By no means kill your mother.”

And the sword was laid down.

Her First Words Were Not a Cry for Help

The mother was not killed, but she was “shut within the inner palace and not let out again.”

The first thing she did was to bow from afar toward Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa and pay homage to the Buddha. And her first words were not a plea for rescue, but this: “In former times the Tathāgata, the World-Honored One, constantly sent Ānanda to console me. Now I am filled with sorrow; the World-Honored One is majestic and grave, and I have no way to see him.”

Someone used to come and see me, and now no one comes — that is what she says first.

Then the Buddha came. The sūtra writes it strangely: Maudgalyāyana and Ānanda came through the air, while the Buddha himself “vanished from Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa and appeared within the royal palace.” Not appearing on the way, but simply present at the other end — because the restrictions in the palace were so severe that, had anyone seen the Buddha come in from outside, further obstruction would only have been raised.

Vaidehī raised her head, saw the Buddha, and “broke off her own necklaces, cast her whole body upon the ground, and wept aloud toward the Buddha.”

Those necklaces were the very things that had hidden the grape juice a few days before. Now she tore them off with her own hands. Ordinarily her clothes and ornaments were attended to by others; seeing the Buddha now, in her shame she pulled them off without even undoing the clasps.

She asked two questions: “What offence did I commit in a former life, that I should bear so evil a son?” and “What causes and conditions can the World-Honored One have, that he should have Devadatta for a kinsman?”

The first question is asked about herself; the second is asked about the Buddha. Her meaning is plain: if even a buddha has a Devadatta, then why do I have an Ajātaśatru?

To the first question the sūtra makes no direct reply.

From “I Do Not Want This Place” to “I Want That One”

The real turn comes in the next sentence: “I pray only that the World-Honored One will expound to me at length a place without sorrow or torment. I would be born there, and take no more delight in Jambudvīpa, this turbid and evil world.”

She stops asking why, and begins to ask where.

And what she means to leave is not only that palace. The sūtra goes on: “This turbid and evil place is filled with hell beings, hungry ghosts, and animals, and there are many gatherings of what is not good. May I in the future not hear the sounds of evil, nor see evil persons.”

The whole of Jambudvīpa is evil, and there is not one place in it worth coveting — what she means to relinquish is the entire world. This is the conclusion forced out of her by a son of her own body: if even a son born of one’s own body can turn a murderous mind upon his parents, how much more anyone unrelated. And so she makes no distinction between near and distant kin, and gives up all together.

Then come four words: “beg in sorrow for repentance.”

To go to a pure place, one must first own the old debts on one’s own account. She did not wait for the Buddha to remind her.

Only last comes the request for the Dharma: “I pray only that the Buddha-sun will teach me to contemplate the place of pure karma.”

The words “Buddha-sun” set Dharma and simile side by side — when the sun comes out, all darkness is wholly removed; when the Buddha’s wisdom shines, the long night of ignorance grows bright. What she asks for is not the name of a place, but the means of getting there.

The Measureless Lands upon the Terrace of Light

The Buddha did not answer directly. He sent forth the light between his brows; the light turned into a golden terrace, and the pure lands of the buddhas of the ten directions all appeared within it.

Some lands were composed of the seven precious substances, some purely of lotus flowers, some like the palace of Īśvara, some like a mirror of crystal. The sūtra lists them one by one, and then says that he “let Vaidehī see them.”

Why not simply name one? Why make them all appear?

Because if it were only told to her, she could not see it, and a doubt would remain in her mind. So they were manifested one by one, set before her eyes, for her to look at and to choose for herself.

And she chose: “I now delight to be born in the world of Ultimate Bliss, where Amitābha Buddha is.”

That sentence is her own. The Buddha revealed the lands of the ten directions and designated none of them — and the one she chose is precisely the one he was about to teach.

What the Buddha Taught First Was Not Contemplation

Having chosen, what she asked for was a practice: “Teach me reflection, teach me right reception.”

But what the Buddha spoke of first was not contemplation. It was the three kinds of merit.

“First: be filial and care for father and mother, serve and attend teachers and elders, be kindly of mind and not kill, and cultivate the ten wholesome deeds. Second: take up and hold the three refuges, be complete in the various precepts, and not transgress in deportment. Third: give rise to the aspiration for awakening, believe deeply in cause and effect, recite the scriptures of the Great Vehicle, and encourage and urge on those who practise.”

The order here is worth pausing over. The capacities of sentient beings are of two kinds: some can be concentrated, some are scattered and unsettled; and if only the way of concentration were taught, a great many people could not take hold of it. So the three kinds of merit are opened out first, and those who are scattered also have a road to walk.

And the first of the three kinds of merit is to be filial and care for father and mother.

In a sūtra initiated by the killing of a father and the imprisoning of a mother, the first good deed the Buddha names is filial care for father and mother. The sūtra does not point out the contrast; it simply goes on speaking in order. Parents are the utmost field of merit in the world, and the Buddha is the utmost field of merit beyond the world; if a person will not acknowledge even the utmost field of merit in the world, there is no way to begin saying anything else to him.

When the three kinds of merit have been taught, the Buddha adds a sentence: “These three kinds of karma are the very cause of the pure karma of all the buddhas of the past, the future, and the present.”

Not an expedient devised for this one occasion and this one person.

“You Are an Ordinary Person”

In the last section of the introduction the Buddha formally charges them to listen and permits the teaching: “Listen intently, listen intently! Reflect well upon it and keep it in mind.” Listening intently is so that the wisdom born of hearing may arise; reflecting well is the wisdom of reflection; keeping it in mind is the wisdom of cultivation.

Then he explains why seeing is possible at all: “By the Buddha’s power they will be able to see that pure land, as when one holds a bright mirror and sees one’s own face.”

Holding a mirror to look at one’s own face is the least effortful kind of seeing there is. And before that, the sūtra has already said four words: “by the Buddha’s power.”

Then the Buddha says something very weighty to Vaidehī: “You are an ordinary person; the thought of your mind is weak and inferior, you have not yet gained the deva-eye, and you cannot see far.”

Whom is that sentence spoken to?

If you take Vaidehī to have been a sage all along, a great bodhisattva merely putting on a display, then this sūtra has nothing to do with you — what a sage can contemplate, we cannot. And so the sūtra fixes her here as an ordinary person: the thought of her mind weak and inferior, her sight insufficient, unable to see that far. What an ordinary person who cannot see depends upon is that “the buddhas, the tathāgatas, have a different skillful means.”

On this point the commentators of old read in two ways: one says that she is indeed an ordinary person, and that this word of the Buddha is precisely to cut off the later doubt that “she could do it because she was a sage”; the other says that she is in reality a great bodhisattva who displays herself as one among ordinary beings. Both readings stand, and both are preserved here without adjudication.

What the sūtra itself says is those four words.

The Last Question Is Asked for Those Who Come After

The introduction closes on Vaidehī’s last question:

“One such as I am today sees that land by the Buddha’s power. But after the Buddha has passed away, when sentient beings are turbid, evil, and not good, pressed by the five sufferings, how are they to see Amitābha Buddha and the world of Ultimate Bliss?”

She has already seen. What she asks about is what people are to do after the Buddha has passed away.

Among the five turbidities, the turbidity of the aeon is not that the aeon itself is turbid, but that when the aeon declines the many evils increase; the turbidity of views is turning all one’s own evils into good and seeing everything in others as wrong; and the five sufferings are the suffering of birth, of old age, of sickness, of death, and of parting from what is loved.

Someone who has just come alive from under the blade, who has just seen the pure lands of the ten directions with her own eyes, turns back and asks: those who have no buddha in the world, and who are pressed by these things — how are they to see? Among the people she asks for, we are included.

Here the introduction ends. In the next sentence, the Buddha begins to teach the contemplation of the sun.

The reason the whole sūtra needs so long a passage for its introduction lies in that one question: it first lets us see how a person comes to have nowhere left to go, and then lets us see for whom that road was opened.

Carrying Forward — Two Sets of Eyes, Two Introductions

What stands above is the meaning of this long passage of the sūtra in its own right. What follows lets two sets of eyes, from the Sui and the Tang, shine upon it from the side — a mirror is not the sūtra, only the same matter in the royal palace seen under two ways of reading.

The line of Shandao is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He assigns the introduction all the way to “how are they to see the world of Ultimate Bliss,” and begins the main body at the contemplation of the sun, saying openly that this division of his is “not the same as that of the various masters” — for in his view, though there are many meanings above the contemplation of the sun, “when one looks at the movement of the text, it is only the causal introduction.” Within the introduction he distinguishes seven causes and settles every sentence upon the event: the glossing of “taking” and “holding,” the manner of filling the necklaces with juice, the reason for laying a hand on the sword and withdrawing backward, the calculation behind the prince’s asking “is he still alive” rather than asking directly about death — each has its explanation. He reads Vaidehī as an ordinary person, and reads Ajātaśatru by holding him to the deed. And the governing theme of the whole sūtra, as he reads it, is that “this Contemplation Sūtra takes the samādhi of contemplating the Buddha as its governing theme, and likewise takes the samādhi of recollecting the Buddha as its governing theme, with single-minded dedication of the vow to birth in the Pure Land as its substance”; the place of this sūtra, as he reads it, is that Śākyamuni sends forth from this quarter while Amitābha comes from that land to welcome — “called from there and sent forth from here, how could one not go?” He further distinguishes two levels within this sūtra, the essential gate and the vast vow: the essential gate is the two gates of concentration and scattering in this sūtra, while the vast vow is that “of all ordinary beings, good or evil, who attain birth there, there is none who does not ride upon the power of Amitābha Buddha’s great vow and its karmic force as the dominant condition.”

The line of Zhiyi is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He ends the introduction at “the place of pure karma,” so that everything from the sending forth of light enters the main teaching; and the governing theme of the whole sūtra he establishes as “contemplation of mind as the governing theme and true reality as the substance,” saying further that “when contemplation of mind is pure the buddha-land is pure — this is the sūtra’s governing purport,” and dividing this land from that by four kinds of pure land. Reading the initiating introduction, he says outright that “the present sūtra takes precisely the killing of the father as its initiating occasion,” and that the reason for raising such an act of rebellion is “to display the utter evil of this realm, so that people may be wearied of it and cast it away” — if even a son of one’s own body can act so, only then can people be taught to delight together in the Pure Land. Reading Ajātaśatru and Devadatta, he judges them to be “the skillful expedient manifestations of a great being, who walks in what is not the path and thereby penetrates the Buddha’s path”; reading Vaidehī, he judges her to be “in reality a great bodhisattva, who at this assembly attains the patience of non-arising, and displays herself as one among ordinary beings.” He is especially detailed in glossing names: Gṛdhrakūṭa is rendered Spirit Vulture; Diaoda is here rendered Deva-Heat; Jīvaka is here rendered Made Firmly Alive; the five parts of the body are the two elbows, the two knees, and the crown of the head; chanmo is a Sanskrit word while huiguo, confessing one’s faults, is Chinese.

The two draw the introduction differently, establish the governing theme differently, and read Ajātaśatru and Vaidehī differently. One line reads this matter in the royal palace as a real event, the other reads it as the expedient manifestation of a great being; one lets the governing theme of the sūtra come to rest in recollecting the Buddha and dedicating the vow, the other in contemplation of mind and true reality.

And the sūtra itself never says which reading is the right one. It only sets down, in order, first a sword, then a light, and last a question.

日想01 Contemplation of the Sun

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

韋提希求的是極樂國土,佛答應教她。而佛教她的第一件事,是坐下來,面向西,看太陽落下去。

這一段只有一百三十五字,是全經最短的段落之一。善導《觀經四帖疏》把它判作正宗分的第一句所在——序分那一長串王宮之事,到這裡才算說完;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》則把十六觀分成三截,前六觀看依報、次七觀看正報、後三觀說三輩往生,這一觀是第一截的第一。兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

佛沒有直接給那個國土

前一段裡,佛已經放光把十方諸佛的淨土全現在金臺上讓她看過了。她也已經挑定了極樂。

照理說,接下來該直接教她怎麼看那個國土。

但佛先說的是:「汝及眾生應當專心,繫念一處,想於西方。」

先不說看什麼,先說心要放在哪裡。而且不是放在西方,是「繫念一處」——先要有「一處」,才談得上是哪一處。

眾生的心散動,識比猿猴還躁,一遍六塵就再也停不住。不捨掉攀緣、不託身於靜處,這個「一處」根本立不起來。所以歷來的讀法把這一句拆成八個「一」:一身、一心、一迴向、一處、一境界、一相續、一歸依、一正念——八件事全是一,然後才叫想成就。

「自非生盲」

接著經文說了一句很少見的話:「凡作想者,一切眾生自非生盲,有目之徒,皆見日沒。」

先簡別出一種人:生下來就眼盲的。

生盲,是從母胎裡出來眼睛就看不見東西。這種人不能教他作日想,因為他不認得日輪的光相——沒有見過的東西,無從去想。

但這句話真正的分量在後半:除了生盲以外,後來因緣患眼的人,教他作日想都能成就。因為他在還沒有患眼的時候,已經認得日輪光明的相了;如今眼雖然壞了,只要善取那個相、正念堅持,不限什麼時節,一樣能成。

也就是說,這一觀的門檻不是眼力,是曾經見過

而經文用來作門檻的,是一件全世界的人都見過的事——太陽下山。

經文沒有要求誰先有神通、先得天眼、先積多少功課。它只問一句:你見過日落嗎?見過,就有得作。這一問是連著上一段來的——上一段佛才剛說過「汝是凡夫,心想羸劣,未得天眼,不能遠觀」,此處立刻把所觀之境放低到一個凡夫的眼睛正好夠得著的地方。

為什麼偏偏是日

古來注家在此設了一問:她求的是極樂之境,佛既然答應說了,為什麼先教她住心觀日?

答有三意。

第一,指方有在。日正東出,直西沒;彌陀佛國就在日沒的那一頭,直西超過十萬億剎。要眾生識境住心,先得有一個方向可指。不取冬夏兩時,只取春秋二際——因為那兩季日出正東、日落正西,方位最準。

一個看不見的國土,藉著一個天天看得見的東西定了方位。

第二,識知自己的業障有多重。這一意最出人意料,下一節單說。

第三,識知彼土的光相。極樂依正二報的種種莊嚴光明,內外照曜,超過這個太陽百千萬倍。若你不認得那邊的光是什麼樣子,就先看這一輪日的光明之相——先有一個最低的參照,才知道所謂『超過百千萬倍』是超過什麼。

三意合起來說的是同一件事:這一輪日,是此界唯一夠格拿來比的東西。娑婆是一間暗屋,觸目所及沒有一樣可以比方彼土;只有朗日舒輝,還能寄想遠標於極樂。

日輪上的三種雲

第二意值得停久一點。

當一個人真按這個法子坐定——身正、心不散、緩緩轉心去看那輪日——利根的人一坐就見明相現前,或者像一枚錢那麼大,或者像一面鏡子那麼大。

而就在那片明亮上,他會看見自己業障的輕重。

一種是黑障,像黑雲遮日;一種是黃障,像黃雲遮日;一種是白障,像白雲遮日。日被雲遮著,就不能朗然顯照;眾生的業障也是這樣,遮住淨心之境,使心照不明。

這是一個很誠實的設計:修行的進度不必問人,看那輪日亮到什麼程度就知道。

看見了怎麼辦?經文沒有說,而行門裡說了:嚴飾道場、安置佛像、洗浴著淨衣、燒名香,向佛形像懺悔無始以來身口意所造的一切;要悲涕雨淚,深生慚愧,內徹心髓,切骨自責。懺完再回來照前法坐,若那三障盡除、所觀之境朗然明淨,這叫頓滅;若一懺只除一色、要幾次才除盡,這叫漸除。

至於什麼時候懺,古人的話很不客氣:像滾水烈火燒到身上,一覺得就得立刻甩開——哪裡容得下等時候、等地方、等因緣、等人,才開始除。

閉目開目皆令明了

正教觀察只有一句:「當起想念,正坐西向,諦觀於日,令心堅住,專想不移。」

身要正、面要向西、眼要諦觀、心要堅住、想要不移——五件事一件不缺。

然後是觀成的驗證:「既見日已,閉目開目皆令明了。」

睜著眼看得見不算,閉上眼還在,才算成。因為睜眼所見可能是眼睛的事,閉眼還在的才是心的事。

到這一步,會有三昧的定樂現前,身心內外融液,不可思議。

最容易失掉的那一刻

而恰恰在這一刻,最容易失掉。

古來的讀法在此下了一句很重的提醒:見到這個境的時候,務必攝心令定,不得起貪取之心。一起貪心,心水就動;心一動,淨境當下就沒了。或動、或暗、或黑,或現出青黃赤白種種雜色,再也定不下來。

補救的辦法也極簡單:知道是自己貪心動了念,就安心正念,還從本處起——動相即除,靜心還現。

我們大概都認得這個過程。好不容易安靜下來,剛覺得『有了』,那一念『有了』自己就把它弄沒了。

正觀與邪觀

全段收在一個判上:「作是觀者,名為正觀。若他觀者,名為邪觀。」

判準是什麼?

觀日而見日,心與境相應,是正;觀日而不見日,卻見出別的雜境來,心與境不相應,是邪。

這個判準裡沒有一句是關於境界高低的。它只問一件事:你要看的,和你看見的,是不是同一個。

所以邪觀不是指看見了可怕的東西,也不是指心術不正。心裡想的是日,眼前現出來的卻是別的,那就叫不相應——縱使現出來的是一片光明、一座樓閣,只要不是所觀的那一個,一樣是邪。這個判法把「觀」定死在相應二字上,不留給人自我解釋的餘地。

而這一判並非只管這一觀——以下十五觀的邪正得失,一同於此。第一觀立下的不只是一個所觀之境,是一把往後十五觀都要用的尺。

經文於是把整個十六觀的次第,架在一件最平常的事上:一個人,坐下來,向西,看太陽落下去。

承衍——兩副眼看同一輪落日

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一輪落日,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把正宗分定在這一句上,並自陳「今定立正宗,與諸師不同」。他釋此觀分五段:總告總勸、牒所觀事、正教觀察、辯觀成相、總結。三意之答出於他;坐法之詳出於他——跏趺正坐、右脚著左髀上、左手安右手上、令身正直、合口而齒不相近、舌抵上腭以通氣道;散五大於五方而唯留識大「湛然凝住,猶如圓鏡」,也出於他。業障三色、懺悔頓漸、貪心動境,皆是他所出的行門細目。在他,這一觀是「假依」——日輪是此界相似可見之境,非彼國真實無漏之境,藉假以入真。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他釋此觀甚簡:「示令繫心」,然後逐句標科而止於「「是為」下,結也」。他所繫的義不在行法而在除疑——「教令正觀,為除疑心」,並引大本所明,以疑惑心修功德而生彼國者落在邊地、復受胎生,故須作此觀以除疑惑。滅罪與否,他留到第三地觀才判:「前水是想,不能滅罪。地觀是實,故能除斷也。」而他在自己那篇序裡,用的正是這一觀的譬:「落日懸鼓,用標送想之方」。

一路把這一輪日讀成行門的入口,量到坐姿與呼吸;一路把它讀成除疑的方便,量到位次與滅罪。

而經自己只說了一句:見日欲沒,狀如懸鼓。

What Vaidehī asked for was the land of Ultimate Bliss, and the Buddha consented to teach her. The first thing he taught her was to sit down, face the west, and watch the sun go down.

This passage runs to only one hundred and thirty-five characters and is one of the shortest in the sūtra. Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles judges it to be the place where the first sentence of the main body stands — the long train of events in the royal palace that makes up the introduction is only now finished. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life instead cuts the sixteen contemplations into three lengths: the first six contemplate the dependent recompense, the next seven the direct recompense, and the last three speak of birth in that land by the three grades — and this contemplation is the first of the first length. The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

The Buddha Did Not Hand Over That Land Directly

In the passage just before, the Buddha had already sent out light and made all the pure lands of the buddhas of the ten directions appear on a golden dais for her to see. She had already settled on Ultimate Bliss.

By rights, what should come next is direct instruction in how to look at that land.

But what the Buddha says first is this: “You and all sentient beings should make the mind single, bind your thought to one place, and form the image of the west.”

Before saying what is to be looked at, he says where the mind is to be put. And it is not put in the west; it is bound to one place — there must first be a one place before there can be any question of which place it is.

The minds of sentient beings are scattered and restless; consciousness is more restless than a monkey, and once it has ranged over the six dusts it can no longer be brought to a stop. Unless entanglement is let go of and the body entrusted to stillness, this one place cannot be set up at all. And so the readings handed down have split this one sentence into eight ones: one body, one mind, one dedication and direction, one place, one object, one continuity, one refuge, one right mindfulness — eight things, every one of them one, and only then is the image called accomplished.

“Unless One Is Blind from Birth”

The sūtra then says something rarely met with: “Of all who form the image, every sentient being who is not blind from birth, everyone who has eyes, sees the sun set.”

One kind of person is first set aside: the one blind from birth.

Blind from birth means that from the time he came out of the mother’s womb his eyes did not see things. Such a person cannot be taught to form the image of the sun, because he does not know the luminous appearance of the sun’s orb — what has never been seen cannot be imaged.

But the real weight of the sentence lies in its second half: apart from those blind from birth, one whose eyes were afflicted by later circumstance can be taught to form the image of the sun and will succeed in it. Before his eyes were afflicted he already knew the appearance of the sun’s brightness; now, though the eyes are ruined, if only he takes up that appearance well and holds it firmly in right mindfulness, with no limit set of season or time, he will succeed all the same.

That is to say, the threshold of this contemplation is not eyesight. It is having once seen.

And what the sūtra sets as the threshold is something everyone in the world has seen — the sun going down.

The sūtra does not require that anyone first possess supernormal powers, first obtain the divine eye, first accumulate a certain amount of practice. It asks a single question: have you seen the sun set? If you have, there is something here for you to do. That question follows directly from the passage before, where the Buddha had just said, “You are an ordinary person; your power of forming images is weak and frail, you have not yet obtained the divine eye, and you cannot see at a distance.” Here the object to be contemplated is at once set low enough that the eyes of an ordinary person can just reach it.

Why the Sun of All Things

The commentators of old set a question here: what she asked for was the objects of Ultimate Bliss, and since the Buddha consented to teach, why did he first teach her to settle the mind and contemplate the sun?

The answer is given in three intents.

First, the direction pointed to has a definite place. The sun rises due east and sets due west; Amitābha’s buddha-land lies at the far end of that setting, straight west beyond a hundred thousand koṭis of lands. If sentient beings are to know the object and settle the mind, there must first be a direction that can be pointed to. Not the two seasons of winter and summer, but only the two junctures of spring and autumn — because in those two the sun rises due east and sets due west, and the bearing is most exact.

A land that cannot be seen has its bearing fixed by something that can be seen any day.

Second, knowing how heavy one’s own karmic obstruction is. This intent is the most unexpected of the three, and the next section takes it up alone.

Third, knowing the luminous appearance of that land. The manifold adornments and radiance of the twofold recompense of Ultimate Bliss, dependent and direct, shine within and without, surpassing this sun a hundred thousand ten-thousandfold. If you do not know what the light over there is like, then look first at the appearance of the brightness of this one orb — only with a lowest term of comparison in hand does one know what it is that surpassing a hundred thousand ten-thousandfold surpasses.

The three intents taken together say one and the same thing: this one orb is the only thing in this world fit to be set beside that land. The Sahā world is a dark house, and nothing the eye falls on can serve to compare with that land; only the bright sun spreading its radiance can still let the image be lodged and Ultimate Bliss be marked from afar.

Three Kinds of Cloud on the Sun’s Orb

The second intent is worth pausing over longer.

When someone truly sits down by this method — body upright, mind unscattered, the mind turned slowly to look at that orb — one of sharp faculties sees the bright appearance present before him in a single sitting, perhaps the size of a coin, perhaps the size of a mirror’s face.

And on that very brightness he sees whether his own karmic obstruction is light or heavy.

One kind is the black obstruction, like a black cloud obstructing the sun; one is the yellow obstruction, like a yellow cloud obstructing the sun; one is the white obstruction, like a white cloud obstructing the sun. The sun, obstructed by cloud, cannot shine forth brightly; the karmic obstruction of sentient beings is likewise, screening the object of the pure mind so that the mind cannot illumine clearly.

This is a very honest arrangement: one need not ask another how far one has come in practice; one need only see how bright that orb has become.

And once it is seen, what then? The sūtra does not say, but the gate of practice does: adorn the place of practice, set up an image of the Buddha, bathe clean and put on pure garments, burn fine incense, and before the Buddha’s image repent of everything done by body, speech, and mind from the beginningless past; weep in sorrow with raining tears, give rise to deep shame that penetrates within to the marrow of the heart, and reproach oneself to the bone. When the repentance is finished, return and sit as before. If those three obstructions are wholly removed and the object contemplated is bright and clear, this is called sudden extinction; if one repentance removes only one colour and several are needed before all are gone, this is called gradual removal.

As for when to repent, the words of the ancients are blunt: it is like boiling water or fire burning the body — the moment one feels it, one throws it off. How could there be room to wait for the time, wait for the place, wait for the conditions, wait for the person, and only then begin?

Clear and Distinct Whether the Eyes Are Closed or Open

The direct teaching of how to observe is a single sentence: “You should raise up this thought and image: sit upright facing the west and look closely at the sun; make the mind stand firm, and hold the image single without letting it shift.”

The body upright, the face west, the eyes looking closely, the mind standing firm, the image not shifting — five things, and not one of them missing.

Then comes the test of accomplishment: “Once the sun has been seen, let it be clear and distinct whether the eyes are closed or open.”

Seeing it with the eyes open does not count; only its remaining when the eyes are shut counts as accomplished. For what is seen with the eyes open may be a matter of the eyes; what remains when the eyes are shut is a matter of the mind.

At this step the settled bliss of samādhi comes to be present, and body and mind, within and without, melt and flow beyond all conceiving.

The Moment It Is Most Easily Lost

And it is at precisely this moment that it is most easily lost.

The readings handed down set down a heavy warning here: when this object is seen, one must by all means gather the mind and make it settled, and must not let a mind of craving and grasping arise. Let a craving mind arise, and the water of the mind stirs; let the mind stir, and the pure object is gone that instant. It may stir, or darken, or blacken, or bring out a jumble of blue and yellow and red and white, and settle no more.

The remedy is equally simple: know that it is one’s own craving mind that has moved, then settle the mind in right mindfulness and start again from where it began — the stirring appearance is removed, and the still mind appears again.

We probably all recognize this process. Quiet is reached with difficulty, and just as one feels there it is, that very thought of there it is undoes it.

Right Contemplation and Wrong Contemplation

The whole passage closes on a judgment: “To make this contemplation is called right contemplation; to make another contemplation is called wrong contemplation.”

What is the criterion?

Contemplating the sun, one sees the sun: mind and object correspond, and that is right. Contemplating the sun, one does not see the sun but brings out other mixed objects instead: mind and object do not correspond, and that is wrong.

There is not a word in this criterion about how high or low the object seen is. It asks one thing only: is what you meant to look at the same as what you saw?

Wrong contemplation therefore does not mean seeing something dreadful, nor does it mean a crooked intent. What is in the mind is the sun, and what appears before it is something else: that is what non-correspondence means. Even if what appears is a spread of light or a storied tower, so long as it is not the one thing contemplated, it is wrong all the same. This way of judging pins contemplation down to correspondence and leaves no room for anyone to explain himself out of it.

And this judgment does not govern only this one contemplation — for the fifteen that follow, wrong and right, gain and loss, are one and the same as here. What the first contemplation sets up is not merely an object to be contemplated; it is a measuring rod that the fifteen to come will all have to use.

The sūtra thus frames the whole sequence of the sixteen contemplations upon the most ordinary of things: a person sits down, faces west, and watches the sun go down.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Setting Sun

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same setting sun, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He fixes the main body at this sentence and states of himself, “the main body that I now fix and establish differs from that of the other masters.” He divides this contemplation into five segments: the general charge and general exhortation, citing the matter to be contemplated, directly teaching how to observe, distinguishing the sign of accomplishment, and the general conclusion. The answer in three intents comes from him; the detail of the manner of sitting comes from him — sitting upright with legs crossed, the right foot on the left thigh, the left hand laid on the right hand, the body straight and upright, the mouth closed but the teeth not touching, the tongue propped against the palate so that the breath passages are free. So too does the scattering of the five great elements to the five directions, leaving only the great element of consciousness “resting clear and gathered, like a round mirror.” The three colours of karmic obstruction, sudden and gradual repentance, and the craving mind that stirs and loses the object are all fine articles of the gate of practice that he sets out. For him this contemplation is the “provisional support” — the sun’s orb is an object of this world that resembles and can be seen, not the real, outflow-free object of that land, and one enters the true by way of the provisional.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He explains this contemplation very briefly: “it shows and directs the binding of the mind”; then he marks the outline sentence by sentence and stops at “from ‘this is’ onward is the conclusion.” The meaning he attaches lies not in method but in the removal of doubt — “right contemplation is taught and directed in order to remove the doubting mind” — and he cites what the larger sūtra makes clear, that those who cultivate merits with a doubting mind and are born in that land fall into the border region and further undergo womb-birth; hence this contemplation must be made, to remove doubt. Whether offences are extinguished he leaves until the third contemplation, the contemplation of the ground, before judging: “the water before was image and cannot extinguish offences. The contemplation of the ground is actual, and so can cut them off.” And in the preface to his own fascicle, the simile he uses is precisely this one: “the setting sun, a suspended drum, used to mark the direction in which the image is sent.”

One line reads this orb as the entrance to the gate of practice, and measures it down to posture and breath; the other reads it as the expedient for removing doubt, and measures it by position in the stages and by the extinction of offences.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: seeing the sun about to set, its shape like a suspended drum.

水想02 Contemplation of the Water

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

第一觀看的是落日。第二觀,經文說:作水想。

可是這一段從頭到尾,真正要人看見的並不是水。水看完了要結成氷,氷看透了要轉成琉璃,琉璃現前了才是所觀之的——一塊裡外通透的地。水只是入口。

這一段三百三十三字,善導《觀經四帖疏》判作六段:先總標地體,次說地下的莊嚴,次說地上的莊嚴,次說空中的莊嚴,次說風鼓樂器而演法音,末後總結。智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》判得簡,只作三段:舉所觀的境、正起觀行、結觀;而他另用四個「轉」標出次第——作水想、變水成氷、變氷為瑠璃、觀瑠璃以成大地。兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

一件此界找得到的平的東西

前一觀教人看日,是因為娑婆是一間暗屋,觸目所及只有那一輪日還亮得夠格,可以拿來遙指極樂。

那麼為什麼還要看水?

古來的讀法在此設了一問:前面教觀日,是為了知道業障的相,所以令觀日;這一觀又教觀水,是什麼緣故?

答得很實在:日輪常照,表的是極樂長久的光暉;可是還怕人以為那個國土的地也像這裡一樣高一塊低一塊。這個世界丘陵坑窪,沒有一處真是平的;要在此界找一件能夠平的東西,沒有比水更合適的了。取這個能平之相,去比況那邊的琉璃地。

換句話說:第一觀借的是『亮』,第二觀借的是『平』。兩件事都是這個世界現成有的,都不必先修出什麼來才看得到。

問話的人還不肯放過:這裡的水又濕又軟,難道那邊的地也像水一樣嗎?

答:此界之平水,只用來對那邊的地一樣沒有高下;至於水結成了氷,那是用來對那琉璃地的內外映徹。

所以水與氷各借一義——水借它的平,氷借它的透。借完了,這兩樣就退場,剩下的是地。

那塊地為什麼是平的

還有一句話容易被讀過去。

那邊的地何以無高無下、內外映徹?古來注家把這件事歸到因地去:彌陀曠劫以來所修的行沒有偏頗,正使與習氣都盡了,所以感得的地輪是這樣的映徹。

這是本經一條貫穿始終的線索:看見的那一片莊嚴,是有來歷的。它不是憑空好看,是一個人在無量劫裡把行修得沒有偏處,才長成這個樣子。

地平,因為行平。

一椀水

經文只說「想見西方一切皆是大水」,沒有說怎麼想得起來。

行門裡卻給了一個極家常的辦法:在靜處取一椀水,滿滿地盛好,放在坐床前的地上,自己坐在床上,眉間貼一件像豆子那麼大的白東西,低頭臨到水面上,一心只照看那一點白,別的什麼都不緣。

剛開始,水面波浪不住,臨面看下去看不見自己的臉。看久了,面相漸漸現出來——先是不住,忽長忽短、忽寬忽狹、忽見忽不見;這個時候更要極細地用心。不多久,水波微細得似動不動,面相就明明地現了。

然後試一件事:等水靜了,隨手投一粒米進去,水波就動遍整椀,那點白也跟著動;再投一粒豆,波更大,白的忽見忽不見;投一顆棗下去,波更大,連自己的頭面都全隱沒不現了。

古人把這個譬解得一字不留:椀,喻的是身這個器;水,喻的是自己的心;波浪,喻的是亂想煩惱。波浪漸漸息下去,就是把眾緣制住捨掉,住心在一境上;水靜而境現,就是能緣的心不亂、所緣的境不動,內外恬靜,所求的相自然顯出來。

而失掉也一樣簡單:細想也好、粗想也好,心水一動,靜境當下就沒了。

一椀水、一粒米、一顆棗——這是一個人可以在自己屋裡做完的實驗。它不告訴你心是什麼,只讓你看見心什麼時候動了。

地下、地上、空中

琉璃地現前之後,經文不急著往下走,先把這塊地上上下下說了一遍。

地下:有金剛與七寶合成的金幢擎著這片地。幢是八個方位、八個稜角完全具足——八楞具足,古來的讀法說那是要顯出它不是圓的。每一個方面百寶所成,每一顆寶珠有一千道光明,每一道光明有八萬四千種顏色。這些光映在琉璃地上,像億千個太陽,看不勝看;新往生的人乍一看,難以周遍看得盡。

地上:黃金作的繩交雜間錯地布著,用七寶劃出界線,分齊清清楚楚。這裡古來注家加了一句提醒:不要以為那裡只有金作的道,而沒有別的寶作的道。

空中:每一顆寶當中出五百種色光,那光像花,又像星星月亮,懸在虛空裡成一座光明臺;臺上樓閣千萬,百寶合成;臺的兩邊各有百億花幢,無量樂器作為莊嚴。

說像花、又像星月的時候,注家點了一句:佛是慈悲,怕人不認得,所以借一個譬喻來顯它。

這句話值得記住。譬喻在這裡不是文采,是不得已——所說的東西這個世界沒有,只好拿這個世界有的東西去靠。整部經的觀法都建在這個不得已上。

一句提醒與兩處讚

地上那一節極短,古來注家卻在經文之外加了一句提醒。

經文只說「以黃金繩,雜廁間錯」,注家便釋道:那是黃金作道,形狀像金繩一樣。接著補了一句——不要以為那裡只有金作的道,而沒有別的寶作的道。或者雜寶為地而琉璃作道,或者琉璃為地而白玉作道,或者紫金白銀為地而百寶作道;如此轉相間雜、轉共合成、轉相照曜,光光色色各各不同,而沒有雜亂。

經文寫了一種,注家提醒我們別把一種讀成只有一種。

偈讚則有兩處,各繫其段,不可混看。一處在總標地體的一節末尾:那裡先說境現失不失與邪正之判一同前觀,接著引天親所讚——「觀彼世界相,勝過三界道,究竟如虛空,廣大無邊際。」——而收之曰「此即總明彼國地之分量也。」。這四句總說的是那整塊地的分量,不是地上這一節。另一處才在地上這一節,注家自作讚語:「寶地莊嚴無比量,處處光明照十方」,說的是地上莊嚴之殊勝。

前面給了那麼多數目:八楞、百寶、千光明、八萬四千色、五百色光、樓閣千萬。而總標那四句一個數目都不用,只說廣大無邊。

數目是給人抓的,無邊是數目抓不住的。經文兩樣都給你。

風吹過去,樂器自己響

最後一節最短,也最出人意料。

八種清風從光明裡出來,鼓動那些樂器,演說苦、空、無常、無我之音。

那一整片琉璃、金幢、寶珠、光臺、樓閣、花幢,鋪陳了那麼久,最後落在四個詞上:苦、空、無常、無我。

莊嚴到極處,說的仍是這四個字。

古來的讀法把它攝作「四倒四真」——凡夫於無常計常、於苦計樂、於無我計我、於不淨計淨,是四倒;反過來才是四真。極樂的風與樂器,日夜演的就是這個。

那個國土沒有一句話是新的。它只是把這一邊聽不進去的話,換一種聽得進去的方式,一直說。

睜眼閉眼都要在

全段收在兩句上。

一句是持守:這個想成就的時候,一樣一樣地觀它,極力使它了了分明;閉上眼、張開眼都不讓它散掉,只除吃飯的時候,其餘時間常常憶念這件事。

第一觀說「閉目開目皆令明了」,這一觀說「閉目開目,不令散失」——同一個驗收標準,換了一個更難的說法:不是看得見就算,是不許丟。

另一句是判:作這樣的觀名為正觀,作其他的觀名為邪觀。判準與第一觀完全一樣,古來的讀法也明說了:境的現與不現、失與不失、邪與正,一同前面的日觀。

一把尺,第一觀立下,這裡直接用。

承衍——兩副眼看同一塊地

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一塊地,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他在玄義分裡先把整個依報切開:日想、水想、氷想是「假依」,因為那是此界相似可見的境相;從瑠璃地以下一直到寶樓觀是「真依」,因為那是彼國真實無漏可見的境相。按這個判,第二觀恰好是假與真的接縫——前半還在借此界之物,後半已經站在彼國之地上了。他又立能依所依之判:七寶池林是能依,瑠璃寶地是所依;地是能持,池臺樹等是所持。十六觀之所以先地而後樹、後池、後樓,理由就在這裡。椀水照面的行法出於他,椀、水、波浪三喻的一一配屬也出於他。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他釋此觀甚簡,三科而已,另用四轉標次第。他獨用力的地方在一個數目:「八種清風」的八是哪八個?他說那邊實在沒有時節可分,若要寄託這個八,就是除去上下,取四方四維,所以說八;並且加了一句——也可以用來對八卦。這是本經兩家注中少見的、以此土的數術相況彼國之語。

一路把這一段讀成一套可以在屋裡做的功課,量到一椀水、一粒米;一路把它讀成一組要說清楚的名數,量到八個方位。

而經自己只說了一句:其光如花,又似星月。

The first contemplation looked at the setting sun. For the second, the sūtra says: form the image of water.

Yet from beginning to end of this passage, what is really to be seen is not water. When the water has been looked at it must freeze into ice; when the ice has been seen through it must turn into beryl; and only when the beryl stands present is the object of the contemplation there — a ground transparent within and without. The water is only the entrance.

This passage runs to three hundred and thirty-three characters. Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles judges it in six segments: first the general setting forth of the substance of the ground, next the adornments beneath the ground, next the adornments upon the ground, next the adornments in the air, next the wind sounding the instruments and setting forth the sound of the Dharma, and last the general conclusion. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life judges it briefly, in three segments only: raising the object to be contemplated, directly setting the practice of contemplation going, and concluding the contemplation; and he marks the sequence besides by four turnings — forming the image of water, changing water into ice, changing ice into beryl, and contemplating the beryl until it becomes the great ground. The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

Something in This World That Can Be Level

The contemplation before this taught one to look at the sun, because the Sahā world is a dark house and, of all the eye falls upon, only that one orb is bright enough to serve for pointing at Ultimate Bliss from afar.

Why, then, must water be looked at as well?

The readings handed down set a question here: above, the contemplation of the sun was taught so that the appearance of one’s karmic obstructions might be known, and therefore the sun was contemplated; now this contemplation teaches the contemplation of water — for what reason?

The answer is plain enough. The sun’s orb shines constantly, and represents the long radiance of Ultimate Bliss; but there was still the fear that one might suppose the ground of that land to be high in one place and low in another, as it is here. This world is all hills and hollows, and there is not one spot in it that is truly level; and if one would find in this world a thing able to be level, nothing is more fit than water. That mark of what can be level is taken up, and by it the ground of beryl there is likened.

Put otherwise: the first contemplation borrowed brightness; the second borrows levelness. Both are things this world already has, and neither has to be cultivated into existence before it can be seen.

The questioner will not let it go: the water here is wet and moreover soft — is the ground there also like this water?

The answer: the level water of this world is used only to answer to the ground there as being equally without height or depth; as for water freezing into ice, that is used to answer to the shining through, within and without, of that ground of beryl.

So water and ice are each borrowed for one meaning — water for its levelness, ice for its transparency. Once they have been borrowed, both withdraw, and what remains is the ground.

Why That Ground Is Level

There is one more sentence here easily read past.

Why is the ground there without height or depth, transparent within and without? The commentators of old refer the matter back to the causal stage: Amitābha’s practice through vast kalpas was even and without partiality, the active defilements and their residues alike gone, and the ground-wheel he called forth is transparent in this way.

This is a thread that runs from end to end of the sūtra: the array of adornments that is seen has a history behind it. It is not beautiful out of nowhere; it grew into this shape because someone, through measureless kalpas, cultivated a practice with no partiality in it.

The ground is level because the practice was level.

A Bowl of Water

The sūtra says only, “form the image of seeing all in the west as one great water.” It does not say how such an image is to be raised at all.

The gate of practice, however, gives a thoroughly homely method. In a quiet place take a bowl of water, fill it well to the brim, and set it on the ground before your sitting-couch; sit on the couch, fix between your brows something white about the size of a bean, bend your head down over the surface of the water, and with the whole mind watch that one point of white and nothing else.

At the beginning the surface will not stop rippling, and looking down you cannot see your own face. Look long, and the face gradually appears — at first unsteady, now long, now short, now broad, now narrow, now seen, now not seen; at this point the mind must be used more finely still. Before long the ripples grow so slight that they seem to move and not to move, and the face appears plainly.

Then try one thing: when the water has grown still, drop a grain of rice into it, and the ripples run through the whole bowl and that point of white moves with them; drop a bean, and the waves are larger and the white is now seen, now not; drop a jujube in, and the waves are larger still, and even your own head and face are wholly hidden and do not appear.

The ancients glossed this simile without leaving a word of it over: the bowl is a simile for the body as vessel; the water is a simile for one’s own mind; the waves are a simile for scattered images and the afflictions. The waves gradually coming to rest is the checking and letting go of the manifold entanglements and the settling of the mind upon a single object; the water still and the object appearing is the mind that apprehends being unscattered and the object apprehended not moving, within and without calm and quiet, and the appearance that was sought standing out plainly.

And losing it is just as simple: with a subtle image or with a coarse one, once the water of the mind stirs, the still object is gone that instant.

A bowl of water, a grain of rice, a jujube — this is an experiment a person can finish in his own room. It does not tell you what the mind is; it only lets you see when the mind has moved.

Beneath the Ground, Upon the Ground, in the Air

Once the ground of beryl stands present, the sūtra is in no hurry to move on. It first speaks of this ground from top to bottom.

Beneath: there are golden banners of adamant and the seven precious substances holding the ground up. The banners have eight sides and are complete with eight angles — being complete with eight angles, say the readings handed down, is to show that they have no round shape. Each single side is made of a hundred jewels; each single jewel-pearl has a thousand rays of light; each single ray has eighty-four thousand colours. These rays shine upon the ground of beryl like a koṭi of thousands of suns, more than looking can exhaust; one newly born there, at first glance, can hardly take them all in.

Upon: cords made of yellow gold are spread in mingled order, the boundaries marked out with the seven precious substances, their divisions plain and clear. Here the commentators of old add a caution: do not suppose that in that land there are only pathways made of gold and none made of the other precious substances.

In the air: within each single jewel there come forth rays of five hundred colours; those rays are like flowers, and again like the stars and the moon, and hanging in empty space they form a dais of light; upon the dais are towers by the thousand and the myriad, made of a hundred jewels combined; and on either side of the dais are a hundred koṭis of flower banners and measureless instruments of music, serving as adornment.

Where they are said to be like flowers and again like the stars and the moon, the commentators mark one thing: the Buddha is compassionate, and feared that people would not recognize them, and so borrowed a simile to show them forth.

That sentence is worth keeping. A simile here is not ornament; it is what one is driven to. What is spoken of does not exist in this world, and so one is left to lean on what this world does have. The whole contemplative method of the sūtra is built upon that necessity.

One Caution and Two Places of Praise

The section on what is upon the ground is extremely short, yet the commentators of old added to the sūtra’s words a caution of their own.

The sūtra says only that cords of yellow gold are spread in mingled order, and the commentators gloss it: gold forms the pathways, whose shape is like golden cords. Then they add — do not suppose that there are only pathways made of gold and none made of the other precious substances. It may be that mingled jewels form the ground and beryl forms the pathways, or that beryl forms the ground and white jade forms the pathways, or that purple gold and white silver form the ground and a hundred jewels form the pathways; in this way they are inlaid one within another, combined one with another, and shine one upon another, light upon light and colour upon colour each unlike the rest, and yet with no confusion in them.

The sūtra wrote down one arrangement; the commentators warn us not to read one arrangement as the only one.

Of praise in verse there are two places, each attached to its own segment, and they are not to be run together. The first stands at the end of the segment that generally sets forth the substance of the ground: there, after it has been said that the appearing or losing of the object and the judgment of right and wrong are the same as in the preceding contemplation, Vasubandhu’s praise is cited — “Contemplate the aspect of that world: it surpasses the paths of the three realms; ultimate, like space, it is vast and without bound” — and it is gathered up with the words, “this in general clarifies the measure of the ground of that land.” Those four lines speak in general of the measure of the whole of that ground, not of the segment on what is upon it. The second stands in the segment on what is upon the ground, where the commentator makes words of praise of his own: “The jeweled ground’s adornment is beyond all measure; everywhere its light shines upon the ten directions,” and this speaks of the excellence of the adornments upon the ground.

So many numbers have been given already: eight angles, a hundred jewels, a thousand rays, eighty-four thousand colours, five hundred coloured rays, towers by the thousand and the myriad. And those four lines of general setting forth use not one number at all; they say only, vast and without bound.

Numbers are there for a person to take hold of; the boundless is what no number takes hold of. The sūtra gives you both.

The Wind Passes, and the Instruments Sound of Themselves

The last segment is the shortest and the most unexpected.

Eight kinds of pure wind come forth from the light, sound those instruments of music, and set forth the sounds of suffering, emptiness, impermanence, and non-self.

That whole expanse of beryl, golden banners, jewel-pearls, daises of light, towers and flower banners has been laid out at such length, and it comes to rest at the end upon four terms: suffering, emptiness, impermanence, non-self.

Adorned to the utmost, what is spoken is still these four words.

The readings handed down gather them up as the four inversions and the four real marks — an ordinary person takes the impermanent for permanent, the suffering for pleasant, the selfless for a self, the impure for pure, and these are the four inversions; the reverse of them is the four real marks. This is what the wind and the instruments of Ultimate Bliss are performing day and night.

Not one word spoken in that land is new. It only takes what cannot be heard on this side and says it, over and over, in a way that can be heard.

Eyes Open or Shut, It Must Still Be There

The whole passage closes upon two sentences.

The first is about holding: when this image is accomplished, contemplate the things one by one and make them utterly clear and distinct; whether the eyes are closed or open, do not let them scatter away and be lost; excepting only the time of eating, recollect this matter constantly at every other time.

The first contemplation said, “let it be clear and distinct whether the eyes are closed or open”; this one says, “whether the eyes are closed or open, do not let them scatter away and be lost” — the same test of accomplishment, stated in a harder way: it is not enough that it can be seen; it may not be dropped.

The second sentence is the judgment: to make this contemplation is called right contemplation; to make another contemplation is called wrong contemplation. The criterion is exactly that of the first contemplation, and the readings handed down say so outright: the object appearing or not, being lost or not, wrong and right, are one and the same as in the contemplation of the sun before.

One measuring rod, set up in the first contemplation, is here taken up and used.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Ground

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same ground, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. In the Section on the Profound Meaning he first cuts the whole dependent recompense apart: the image of the sun, the image of water and the image of ice are the provisional support, because they are objects of this world that resemble it and can be seen; and from the ground of beryl down to the contemplation of the jeweled towers is the true support, because those are the real, outflow-free, visible objects of that land. By this judgment the second contemplation falls exactly upon the seam between the provisional and the true — its first half still borrows things of this world, while its second half already stands on the ground of that land. He sets up besides the judgment of that which rests and that which is rested upon: the pools and groves of the seven precious substances are that which rests, the jeweled ground of beryl is that which is rested upon; the ground is that which bears, the pools, terraces and trees are what is borne. Here lies the reason why the sixteen contemplations take the ground first and the trees, the pools and the towers after. The practice of the face reflected in a bowl of water comes from him, and so does the matching, one by one, of bowl, water and waves.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He explains this contemplation very briefly, in three topics only, and marks its sequence besides by four turnings. Where he alone puts out his strength is upon a number: which eight are the eight kinds of pure wind? He says that in that place there are in truth no seasons, and that if this eight is to be lodged somewhere, then setting aside up and down there remain the four cardinal and the four intermediate directions, and so it says eight; and he adds a further remark — it may also be set against the eight trigrams. This is a rare thing among the two commentaries on this sūtra: a likening of that land by the numerical arts of this one.

One line reads this passage as a set of exercises that can be done indoors, and measures it down to a bowl of water and a grain of rice; the other reads it as a set of names and numbers to be made exact, and measures it down to eight directions.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: their light is like flowers, and again resembles the stars and the moon.

地想03 Contemplation of the Ground

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

第三觀是全經最短的幾段之一,一百三十七字。

可是它做了三件別的觀沒做的事:把『見到』分成兩層;第一次說出滅罪的劫數;並且由佛特別叫住阿難,交代這個法要傳下去。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把這一觀判作六段,前二段的文字其實還在上一觀的末尾——他讀到「此想成時」就算第三觀開始了。智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》判作四段:漸想觀、實觀、利益、顯觀邪正。兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

粗見

經文說:「水想成已,名為粗見極樂國地。」

前一觀已經見到琉璃地內外映徹了,這裡卻只說「粗見」。

古來的讀法解得很細:凝心不斷,就見到淨土之相;這個叫做「想心中見」,因為還帶著覺想。

意思是:那個境確實現前了,可是現前的方式還是「想」——是你把它想出來的,你知道自己在想。心裡還有一個在看的人和一個被看的東西。

所以叫粗。

粗不是壞。它是真的見到了,昏惑已經除去一分;只是還隔著一層想。

而這個粗,也不是隨手就有的。古來的讀法在凝心不斷之前,先列了四件事:心要先標定一個境,不許雜著別的一起觀;既專在一境,境就自會現前,現前之後還要令它明了;境既已現在心裡,閉眼睜眼都守著不許失掉;行住坐臥四種威儀之中晝夜常念,只除睡著的時候,其餘一概憶持不捨。四件備了,才輪得到第五件的凝心不斷。所謂粗見,是這一路做下來的落點,不是坐下去就有的。

了了分明

接下來一句才是這一觀的重心:「若得三昧,見彼國地,了了分明,不可具說。」

古來的讀法:想心漸漸微細,覺念頓時除去,正受與心相應,證入三昧——那時真見到那個境微妙的事,如何說得盡。

兩層的差別,不在境變得更漂亮,在能看的那一頭變了

第一層裡,還有一個人在想;第二層裡,想心息了,緣慮也亡了,只剩下相應。

而經文形容第二層,用的是一句否定:不可具說。

前面兩觀鋪了那麼多的形容——億千日、光明臺、樓閣千萬、八萬四千色——到這裡忽然不形容了。不是無話可說,是說不完。經文用『說不盡』來標記那一層的到達。

古來的讀法在此處補了一句,說那塊地何以說不盡:地廣沒有邊際,寶幢不止一枝,眾寶的光彩交映,變轉愈出愈多。不是形容的話用完了,是所形容的那個東西自己還在變。也正因為如此,才勸人傾心去看,恆常像對在眼前一樣。

兩句話,答的是兩個請求

這一觀在整部經裡的分量,遠遠超過它的字數。

序分裡韋提希請了兩件事:教我思惟,教我正受。

歷來的讀法把這兩句逐一對回這一觀來:「如此想者名為粗見極樂國土」,答的是「教我思惟」——思惟是觀前的方便,是去想那個國土依正二報的總相別相;「若得三昧,見彼國地,了了分明」,答的是「教我正受」——正受是想心都息、緣慮並亡,三昧相應。

古來注家對此還特別聲明過:這樣的讀法和諸家不同。諸家把「思惟」一句配到三福九品去,當作散善;把「正受」一句通配十六觀,當作定善。他不同意,理由就在這一段——《華嚴》說「思惟正受者但是三昧之異名」,與這一段地觀之文正合;既然如此,思惟一句怎麼能通到散善那邊去。

於是這一百三十七字成了定善之界的文據。「從日觀下至十三觀已來名為定善」——這條線畫在哪裡,靠的就是這裡的兩句話。

八十億劫

「若觀是地者,除八十億劫生死之罪。」

十六觀走到第三觀,第一次出現滅罪的話。前兩觀都沒有。

為什麼偏偏是這一觀?

兩家的答法不同,也正好互相照見。

一路說:因為所觀的是無漏的寶地,所以能除有漏多劫之罪。境是無漏的,罪是有漏的,以彼除此。

一路說:前面的水只是想,不能滅罪;地觀是實,所以能除斷。差別不在境的體,在觀的虛實。

一個從所觀的東西說,一個從能觀的程度說。經文自己沒有解釋為什麼,只給了數目。

而數目後面還跟著一句更要緊的:「捨身他世,必生淨國,心得無疑。」

滅罪不是終點,心得無疑才是。

「心得無疑」四個字,古來的讀法在這裡下了很重的注腳。

修因的正念不可夾雜疑心。夾了疑而往生的人,也還是往生了——但是含在花裡出不來,或者生在邊地,或者墮在宮胎之中。

這是一個很少見的說法:疑不障往生,疑障見佛。你去得成,只是到了之後還要等。

等到什麼時候?等到有大悲的菩薩入開華三昧,疑障才除,宮花開發,身相顯然,法侶接引著去赴佛的法會。

所以這一觀的利益,不只是除八十億劫的罪,還包括一件事:讓心裡不再留著那個『真的嗎』。

為未來世說

這一段中間,佛忽然單獨叫住阿難。

「汝持佛語,為未來世一切大眾欲脫苦者,說是觀地法。」

前面兩觀都是對阿難與韋提希一起說的,這裡第一次分出來——韋提希當面就要用,阿難負責帶到後面去。

古來的讀法在此處把佛出世的本意講得很直:諸佛出世,用種種方便勸化眾生,並不是要人止惡修福去享人天之樂。人天的快樂像一道閃電,一霎就沒了,接著還是回到三惡道去長時受苦。

所以簡別很嚴:那些想捨掉這個生死之身、想脫八苦五苦三惡道苦的人,聽了就信、就肯行的,不惜身命趕緊為他說。若能有一個人捨苦出離生死,這才叫真報佛恩。

一個人。這是古人給「報佛恩」定的數。

而簡別之後,古來的讀法還引了一部經來說兩種人。

一種是:聽人說淨土法門,聽了像沒聽,看了像沒看。這種人是從三惡道來的,罪障還沒有盡,所以生不起信向。

另一種是:一聽說淨土法門,當下悲喜交流,身上的毛都豎起來。這種人過去世已經修習過這個法,如今重新聽到就生歡喜;正念修行,必定得生。

兩段話合起來是一件事:我們對這個法的第一反應,不是這一生才有的。

而經文自己沒有說這些。經文只給了一個條件——「為未來世一切大眾欲脫苦者」。想脫苦,就夠了。

同一把尺,第三次拿出來

這一段收在一句已經聽過的話上:「作是觀者,名為正觀。若他觀者,名為邪觀。」

第一觀的末尾就是這一句。第二觀的末尾也是,只把「作是觀者」寫作「作此觀者」——一字之差,判是同一個。到這裡是第三次。

古來的讀法讀到這裡並沒有再解一遍,只寫了一句:邪正之義,前面日觀中已經說過了。話雖短,兩家在此仍舊各分出一科來標它。同一句判反覆出現,並不因此成為套語;反倒是此後一觀又一觀地重新拿它量過。

而在這短短的一段裡,說話的對象換了三次。

先是佛告阿難與韋提希,說的是觀成之相——對著當座的人說。次是佛單告阿難,說的是把這個法帶到未來去——對著還沒有出生的人說。末了忽然不指名,只留下一個判:這樣觀是正,別樣觀是邪。

由所觀之法,轉入付囑,再轉回判準。這一個轉法,經文自此以下還會屢屢再見。

而三度轉換之中,那把尺始終沒有動過。當座的人所量的是它,未來世的人所量的還是它。

承衍——兩副眼看同一塊地

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一塊地,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把這一觀讀成整部經的樞紐:在玄義分裡,他兩次逐字引這一段,用它把韋提希的兩個請求對回經文,用它畫定善與散善的界,並據此聲明自己與諸師不同。他釋觀成之相分六事,其中第五事釋「粗見」為想心中見、猶有覺想,第六事釋三昧為想心漸微、覺念頓除、正受相應——兩層之分出於他。滅罪繫於無漏之境,疑障之相分含華未出、生邊界、墮宮胎三種,也出於他。而他讀這一觀的起處在「此想成時」,比經文分段之處要早。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他判四段,用「漸想觀」與「實觀」二名標出同一個兩層。他對滅罪的判很簡短,卻是他全書中一條明線:前水是想,不能滅罪;地觀是實,所以能除斷。他在第一觀處就已經說過,這一系列觀法是「為除疑心」的;到這一觀出現「心得無疑」,兩處恰好接上。

一路把這一塊地讀成全經判教的立足點;一路把它讀成從想到實的那一級臺階。

而經自己只說了六個字:了了分明,不可具說。

The third contemplation is one of the shortest passages in the whole sūtra: one hundred and thirty-seven characters.

Yet it does three things no other contemplation does: it divides seeing into two layers; it states for the first time a number of kalpas of offences extinguished; and the Buddha calls Ānanda aside by name to charge him that this teaching be handed on.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles judges this contemplation in six segments, the text of the first two of which in fact still lies at the end of the contemplation before — he reads the third contemplation as beginning at “when this image is accomplished.” Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life judges it in four: the gradual image-contemplation, the actual contemplation, the benefit, and showing the contemplation to be wrong or right. The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

Roughly Seen

The sūtra says: “Once the image of water is accomplished, this is called roughly seeing the ground of the land of Ultimate Bliss.”

The contemplation before had already seen the ground of beryl shining through within and without; here it says only “roughly seen.”

The readings handed down gloss it finely: when the mind is gathered without a break, one sees the appearance of the Pure Land; this is called seeing within the imaging mind, because thought and conception are still present.

Which is to say: that object has indeed come to stand present, but the manner of its presence is still imaging — you thought it out, and you know that you are thinking it. There is still someone looking within the mind, and something looked at.

Hence it is called rough.

Rough does not mean bad. It is really seen, and the dimness of confusion is already lessened by that much; only there is still one layer of imaging in between.

Nor is this roughness had for the asking. Before the mind gathered without a break, the readings handed down set out four things: the mind must first mark out one object and may not contemplate them jumbled together; the mind being fixed upon a single object, the object appears of itself, and once it has appeared it must be made clear and distinct; the object having appeared to the mind, whether the eyes are closed or open it is to be guarded and not lost; and in the four bearings of the body one recollects constantly, day and night, excepting only the time of sleeping, holding it in memory and not letting go. Only when those four are in place does the fifth, the gathering of the mind without a break, come into question at all. What is called roughly seen is where this whole course of practice lands; it is not there the moment one sits down.

Clear and Distinct

The sentence that follows carries the weight of this contemplation: “If one attains samādhi and sees the ground of that land clear and distinct, it is beyond anything that words can tell in full.”

The readings handed down: the imaging mind grows gradually subtler, conceptual thought is removed all at once, right reception corresponds and one realizes samādhi — and then one truly sees the subtle and wondrous matters of that object; how could they be told in full?

The difference between the two layers is not that the object has grown finer. It is that the side which sees has changed.

In the first layer there is still someone imaging; in the second the imaging mind has come to rest, discursive concerns have vanished, and nothing is left but correspondence.

And to describe that second layer the sūtra uses a negation: it cannot be told in full.

The two contemplations before laid out description upon description — a koṭi of thousands of suns, a dais of light, towers by the thousand and the myriad, eighty-four thousand colours — and here, all at once, description stops. Not because there is nothing more to say, but because the saying cannot be finished. The sūtra marks the arrival at that layer by saying that it cannot be told to the end.

The readings handed down add a sentence here on why that ground cannot be told in full: the ground is broad and without bound, the jeweled banners are not one alone, the manifold treasures blaze with colour, and their turnings and changes grow ever more numerous. It is not that words of description have run out; it is that the thing described is still changing. And precisely for that reason beings are exhorted to incline their whole minds toward it, and to keep it constantly as though before their eyes.

Two Sentences Answering Two Requests

The weight of this contemplation within the whole sūtra far exceeds its number of characters.

In the introduction Vaidehī asked for two things: teach me to reflect, teach me right reception.

The readings handed down match those two requests, one by one, back to this contemplation: “one who forms an image in this way is said roughly to have seen the land of Ultimate Bliss” answers to “teach me to reflect” — reflection being the expedient prior to contemplation, the thinking out of the general and the particular characteristics of the twofold recompense of that land, dependent and direct; and “if one attains samādhi and sees the ground of that land clear and distinct” answers to “teach me right reception” — right reception being that the imaging mind wholly rests, discursive concerns all vanish, and there is correspondence with samādhi.

The commentators of old declared expressly that such a reading differs from that of the other masters. The others matched the sentence on reflection with the three kinds of merit and the nine grades, taking it as the good done in a scattered mind, and matched the sentence on right reception throughout with the sixteen contemplations, taking it as the good done in concentration. He does not agree, and his reason lies in this very passage: the Flower Ornament Sūtra says, “reflection and right reception are but a different name for samādhi,” which agrees with this text on the contemplation of the ground; and since that is so, how could the sentence on reflection be carried over to the side of the good done in a scattered mind?

And so these hundred and thirty-seven characters became the textual ground for the bound of the good done in concentration. “From the contemplation of the sun down to the thirteenth contemplation is called the good done in concentration” — and where that line is drawn depends upon the two sentences here.

Eighty Koṭis of Kalpas

“If one contemplates this ground, the offences of eighty koṭis of kalpas of birth-and-death are removed.”

The sixteen contemplations have come as far as the third, and words on the extinction of offences appear for the first time. Neither of the two before had them.

Why this contemplation and no other?

The two houses answer differently, and in answering they show each other up.

One line says: because what is contemplated is a jeweled ground free of outflows, it can remove offences of many kalpas that are with outflows. The object is free of outflows and the offences are with outflows; by that this is removed.

The other says: the water before was image and cannot extinguish offences; the contemplation of the ground is actual, and so can cut them off. The difference lies not in the substance of the object but in whether the contemplation is empty or actual.

One speaks from the thing contemplated, the other from the degree of the contemplating. The sūtra itself explains nothing; it gives only the number.

And after the number comes a sentence that matters more: “Casting off this body, in another life one will surely be born in the pure land, and the mind attains freedom from doubt.”

The extinction of offences is not the terminus. The mind’s attaining freedom from doubt is.

Doubt

Upon those words — the mind attains freedom from doubt — the readings handed down set a heavy note.

The right mindfulness with which the cause is cultivated may not have doubt mixed into it. One who is born there with doubt mixed in is born there all the same — but he is held within the flower and does not come out, or is born in the border region, or falls into a palace-womb.

This is a rarely stated thing: doubt does not obstruct birth in that land; doubt obstructs seeing the Buddha. You get there; only, having arrived, you must still wait.

Wait until when? Until a bodhisattva of great compassion enters the samādhi that opens the flowers; then the obstruction of doubt is removed, the palace-flowers open, the bodily form stands plain, and companions in the Dharma take him by the hand to go to the assembly of the Buddha.

So the benefit of this contemplation is not only the removal of the offences of eighty koṭis of kalpas. It includes one thing more: that the mind should no longer keep by it that question, is it really so?

Taught for the Ages to Come

In the middle of this passage the Buddha suddenly calls Ānanda aside alone.

“Hold the Buddha’s words, and for the great assembly of all the ages to come who wish to be freed from suffering, teach this method of contemplating the ground.”

The two contemplations before were spoken to Ānanda and Vaidehī together; here for the first time they are divided — Vaidehī has use for it before his very eyes, while Ānanda is charged with carrying it to those who come after.

The readings handed down state very bluntly here what the buddhas’ appearing in the world is for: when the buddhas appear and by manifold expedients exhort and transform beings, it is not that they wish people merely to restrain evil and cultivate merit so as to enjoy the pleasures of gods and men. The pleasure of gods and men is like a flash of lightning: in a moment it is gone, and one enters again the three evil destinies to undergo suffering for a long time.

So the sifting is strict: those who wish to cast off this body of birth-and-death, to escape the eight sufferings, the five sufferings and the sufferings of the three evil destinies, and who trust and are willing to practise as soon as they hear — for such, without sparing body or life, teach it at once. If a single person can cast off suffering and come out of birth-and-death, this is called truly repaying the Buddha’s kindness.

One person. That is the figure the ancients set for repaying the Buddha’s kindness.

And after the sifting, the readings handed down cite a sūtra to speak of two kinds of people.

The one: he hears the gate of the Pure Land taught, and hears as though he had not heard, sees as though he had not seen. Such a one has but now come from the three evil destinies; the obstruction of his offences is not yet exhausted, and so no trust or inclination toward it arises in him.

The other: he hears the gate of the Pure Land taught, and on the instant sorrow and joy course through him together and the hair of his body stands up. Such a one has in the past already cultivated this Dharma; hearing it again now, he gives rise to joy, and practising in right mindfulness he will surely be born there.

Both passages say one thing: our first response to this teaching is not something that began in this life.

And the sūtra itself says none of that. The sūtra sets only one condition — for all the ages to come, whoever wishes to be freed from suffering. To wish to be freed from suffering is enough.

The Same Measuring Rod, Taken Out a Third Time

This passage closes upon a sentence already heard: “To make this contemplation is called right contemplation; to make another contemplation is called wrong contemplation.”

The first contemplation ended with just this sentence. So did the second, with only one character altered in the phrase for making it — a difference of a single character, and the same judgment. Here it is the third time.

The readings handed down do not gloss it again when they reach this place; they write only that the meaning of wrong and right has already been stated in the contemplation of the sun. The words are few, yet both houses still set up a separate topic here to mark it. That one judgment recurs does not turn it into a formula; on the contrary, contemplation after contemplation from here on takes it up and measures afresh with it.

And within this one short passage the one addressed changes three times.

First the Buddha tells Ānanda and Vaidehī, and what he speaks of is the sign that the contemplation is accomplished — spoken to those seated before him. Next the Buddha addresses Ānanda alone, and what he speaks of is the carrying of this teaching into the future — spoken for those not yet born. Last, all at once, no one is named, and only a judgment is left: contemplating in this way is right, contemplating otherwise is wrong.

From the method contemplated it turns into entrustment, and then turns back to the criterion. This turn will be seen again and again in the sūtra from here on.

And through all three turns, the measuring rod itself has not moved. Those seated before him are measured by it, and so are the people of the ages to come.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Ground

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same ground, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He reads this contemplation as the pivot of the whole sūtra: in the Section on the Profound Meaning he cites this passage verbatim twice, using it to match Vaidehī’s two requests back to the text of the sūtra, using it to draw the bound between the good done in concentration and the good done in a scattered mind, and on that ground declaring that he differs from the other masters. He opens the sign of accomplishment into six matters, of which the fifth glosses roughly seen as seeing within the imaging mind, thought and conception being still present, and the sixth glosses samādhi as the imaging mind growing subtler, conceptual thought removed all at once, and right reception corresponding — the division into two layers comes from him. So does the attaching of the extinction of offences to an object free of outflows, and the threefold mark of the obstruction of doubt: held within the flower and not coming out, born in the border region, fallen into a palace-womb. And he reads this contemplation as beginning at “when this image is accomplished,” earlier than the sūtra’s own division of the text.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He judges four segments, and by the two names gradual image-contemplation and actual contemplation marks out the very same two layers. His judgment on the extinction of offences is brief, yet it is one of the plain threads of his book: the water before was image and cannot extinguish offences; the contemplation of the ground is actual, and so can cut them off. At the first contemplation he had already said that this course of contemplations is for removing the doubting mind; and here, where the sūtra says that the mind attains freedom from doubt, the two places meet exactly.

One line reads this ground as the standing-place from which the whole sūtra is judged; the other reads it as the one step that leads from image to actuality.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: clear and distinct, beyond anything that words can tell in full.

樹想04 Contemplation of the Trees

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

前三觀走得很快:日、水、地。到第四觀,經文忽然慢下來。

四百一十四字,全用在一棵樹上——樹有多高,葉有多大,葉上有幾種顏色,葉間開什麼花,花上結什麼果,果化成什麼蓋,蓋裡現出什麼。看完了,還要再從樹根開始,一樣一樣重看一遍。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把這一觀判作十段,是定善前六觀中分得最細的一觀;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》判作三段,正觀之中再開五目。兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

「次觀寶樹」

地想成就了,接著看樹。

這個次序不是隨意的。前一觀所成的琉璃地,是能持;池、臺、樹、樓是所持。地立住了,樹才有地方站。

而經文說法的方式也變了。前三觀所說的是一整片的境——日、水、地各是一事;這一觀說「一一觀之」——一棵一棵地看。

觀法在這裡從整片轉入個別。

七重不是七行

「作七重行樹想。」

七重,是七行嗎?

古來的讀法在此明確否定:那個國土廣闊無邊,寶樹寶林哪裡只有七行這麼多。所謂七重,是說一棵樹上——黃金作根、紫金作莖、白銀作枝、碼碯作條、珊瑚作葉、白玉作花、真珠作果,這樣七層各是一寶;而這七層又能互為根莖乃至花果,於是七七四十九重。也有一寶就成一樹的,也有二寶三寶四寶乃至百千萬億不可說寶合成一樹的。

所以「七重」說的不是排數,是層次。

至於「行」,注家釋得極簡:那個國土林樹雖然多,一行一行整齊筆直而沒有雜亂。

還有一個字值得停一下:為什麼叫「想」而不叫「觀」?

因為還不熟練那種自在隨心的真觀,須要藉著假想來住心,才能證得利益。

想是給還做不到觀的人用的。這句話貫穿定善十三觀,到這一觀才被說破。

樹沒有老死

「一一樹高八千由旬」。

八千由旬,古來的折算是三十二萬里。

可是數目不是這一句的重點。注家在此加了一段話,是全段最見義理的地方:那裡沒有老死的樹,沒有小的樹,也沒有初生然後慢慢長大的樹;所有的樹一起就同時頓起,大小數量都齊等。

為什麼?

因為那個位次是無漏無生之界——哪裡還有生死漸長的道理。

這一句把「無生」從一個名相變成了眼前的景象:你在那裡找不到一棵正在長的樹。沒有幼樹,沒有枯樹,沒有一棵樹比另一棵樹早幾年。

這一邊的樹有生有老,一年一年長上來;那一邊的樹「起即同時頓起」,「亦無老死者,亦無小生者,亦無初生漸長者」——沒有一段可數的年歲。

而這些樹是從哪裡來的?注家答:都從彌陀無漏的心中流出——因為佛心是無漏的,所以樹也是無漏的。

顏色從顏色裡出來

接著是一串奇特的句子:

「琉璃色中出金色光;頗梨色中出紅色光;馬腦色中出車𤦲光;車𤦲色中出綠真珠光」。

不是四種寶並排放著,是一種寶的顏色裡出另一種寶的光,一環套一環,四轉之後才用「珊瑚琥珀一切眾寶以為映飾」收住。

這一邊的顏色是各歸各的:紅是紅,綠是綠。那一邊的顏色互相生。

樹上還有一整個世界

往上看,樹上的東西比樹本身還多。

美妙的真珠網彌滿地蓋著樹,每棵樹上七重網,每重網之間有五百億妙華宮殿,像大梵天王的宮殿;宮殿裡自然有諸天童子;每一位童子身上有五百億釋迦毘楞伽摩尼寶作瓔珞;那摩尼寶的光照到一百由旬,好像把一百億個日月合起來——不能一一叫出名字,是眾寶交錯之中顏色最上的。

由樹到網、到宮、到童子、到瓔珞、到瓔珞的光——六層,每層都比上一層更小,而每層的數目都比上一層更大。這是本經寫莊嚴的定法:越往細處走,數目越往大處長。

花果不從裡面長出來

有一句注家的話容易被跳過。

經文說「於眾葉間生諸妙花,花上自然有七寶果」,注家釋道:花與果開的時候,不從裡面長出來。

這一邊的花是從苞裡撐開的,果是從花心裡結出來的,都有一個由內而外的過程。那一邊沒有這個過程——注家說,那是法藏因中之行深,所以自然而有。

還是同一條線:眼前所見的每一樣,都繫在一個人從前所修的行上。樹沒有年歲可數,花不必開苞,因為那不是長出來的。

果裡面現出十方

再往下看,葉、花、果。

每一片葉子縱橫正好相等,各二十五由旬;葉上一千種顏色、一百種紋彩,像天上的纓珞。葉間又有妙花,是閻浮檀金的顏色,像旋轉的火輪一樣在葉子中間宛轉。

然後從中湧出果實,像帝釋天的寶瓶。

果放大光明,化成幢幡與無量寶蓋。而就在這些寶蓋當中——

「映現三千大千世界一切佛事;十方佛國亦於中現。」

一片葉、一朵花、一枚果,果化成一頂蓋,蓋裡現出三千大千世界所有的佛事,十方佛國全在裡面。

從最小處反轉出最大處。前面一路往細裡分,分到一枚果為止;到這裡忽然掉頭,一頂蓋裝下十方。

那個國土的人天,沒有一個看不見。

再看一遍

看完了,經文說:「見此樹已,亦當次第一一觀之」。

見到了還要再看,而且要按次序。

古來的讀法把這個次序排了出來:先觀樹根,次想莖枝乃至花果,次想網與宮殿,次想童子的瓔珞,次想葉的大小與花果的光色,次想幡蓋廣現佛事。能夠這樣一一依次第觀的,沒有不明了的。

六重次第,正好把前面經文說過的東西倒著再走一遍。

第一次是佛說給你聽,第二次是你自己走一遍。聽過與走過,在這一觀裡被分成兩件事。

而經文對觀成的要求只有兩個字:分明。莖、枝、葉、花、果,樣樣都要分明。

不是看見一片金光燦爛就算,是每一樣都認得出來。

承衍——兩副眼看同一棵樹

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一棵樹,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他判十科,是這一觀最詳的分法。七重四十九重之算出於他;樹從彌陀無漏心中流出、無老死無漸長之義出於他;「想」是給未閑真觀者用的一句也出於他;觀成的六重次第更是他獨有的行門條目。他還在此引了兩首讚:一首說「正道大慈悲,出世善根生,淨光明滿足,如鏡日月輪」,一首說「彌陀淨國寶樹多,四面垂條,天衣挂繞」——把一段經文讀成了可以誦的東西。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他釋此觀極簡,正觀五目而已:明樹體、明莊嚴相、明生法、現佛國土、結觀。他對七重、對無生、對次第都沒有出語。可是有一件事只有他有:「釋迦毘楞伽」這個名字,他給了翻名——能聖。這個翻名他寫在後面第十觀觀音的地方,因為那裡這個寶名又出現了一次。

一路把這一棵樹讀成一套要按次序走完的功課;一路把它讀成一組要標清楚的段落與一個要譯出來的名字。

而經自己只說了一句:見此樹已,亦當次第一一觀之。

The first three contemplations move quickly: the sun, the water, the ground. At the fourth the sūtra suddenly slows down.

Four hundred and fourteen characters, all of them spent upon a single tree — how tall the tree is, how large its leaves, how many colours are on the leaves, what flowers open among the leaves, what fruit is set upon the flowers, what canopy the fruit becomes, and what appears within the canopy. And when all of that has been seen, one must begin again at the root of the tree and go over it a second time, one thing at a time.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles divides this contemplation into ten segments, the finest division given to any of the first six contemplations of the good done in concentration; Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life divides it into three, and opens five further items within the direct contemplation. The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

“Next Contemplate the Jeweled Trees”

The image of the ground has been accomplished; next one looks at the trees.

This order is not arbitrary. The beryl ground accomplished in the contemplation before is that which bears; the pools, the terraces, the trees and the towers are what is borne. Only once the ground stands firm is there anywhere for a tree to stand.

And the sūtra’s manner of speaking has changed as well. The first three contemplations set out a single whole expanse — the sun, the water, the ground, each one thing. This contemplation says “contemplate them one by one” — tree by tree.

Here the method of contemplation passes from the whole expanse into the particular.

Seven Layers Are Not Seven Rows

“Form the image of rows of trees in seven layers.”

Seven layers — does that mean seven rows?

The readings handed down deny it outright: that land is broad and boundless, and its jeweled trees and jeweled groves are hardly to be measured at seven rows. What is called seven layers means that upon a single tree gold is the root, purple gold the trunk, white silver the branches, agate the twigs, coral the leaves, white jade the flowers, and pearl the fruit — seven tiers, each of one jewel; and these seven tiers can in turn serve one another as root and trunk and on to flower and fruit, so that they are seven times seven, forty-nine layers. There are also cases where one jewel makes one tree, and cases where two jewels, three, four, and on to a hundred thousand myriad koṭis of jewels beyond telling together make one tree.

So “seven layers” speaks not of how many rows there are but of how many tiers.

As for “row,” the commentators gloss it as briefly as can be: although the groves and trees of that land are many, row after row they stand straight and orderly with no confusion.

And one more word is worth pausing over: why is this called forming an image and not contemplating?

Because one is not yet at ease in that true contemplation which is free and follows the mind, and must borrow a provisional image in order to settle the mind before the benefit can be realized.

The image is for those who cannot yet contemplate. That sentence runs through all thirteen contemplations of the good done in concentration, and only here is it said outright.

The Trees Do Not Grow Old and Die

“Each tree is eight thousand yojanas high.”

Eight thousand yojanas: the conversion handed down is three hundred and twenty thousand li.

But the number is not the point of the sentence. The commentators add a passage here that is the most doctrinal thing in the whole unit: there are no trees there that grow old and die, none that are small, and none that are newly born and then grow slowly larger; all the trees arise at once and together, and their size and number are equal throughout.

Why?

Because that station is a realm without outflows and without arising — and what room is there in it for growing by degrees through birth and death?

That one sentence turns non-arising from a term into a scene before the eyes: there is no tree there that you can find in the act of growing. No saplings, no dead wood, not one tree older than another by a few years.

The trees on this side are born and grow old, rising year by year; the trees on that side “arise all at once and together,” and there are “none that grow old and die, none that are small and newly grown, and none that are newly born and grow by degrees” — not a single countable year among them.

And where do these trees come from? The commentators answer: they all flow forth from Amitābha’s outflow-free mind — because the Buddha’s mind is free of outflows, the trees too are free of outflows.

Colour Comes Out of Colour

Then follows a strange chain of sentences:

“From within the colour of beryl comes forth a golden light; from within the colour of crystal comes forth a red light; from within the colour of agate comes forth the light of giant-clam shell; from within the colour of giant-clam shell comes forth the light of green pearl.”

It is not four jewels set side by side; it is the light of one jewel issuing from within the colour of another, link fastened to link, and only after four turns is it gathered up by “coral, amber, and all the host of jewels serving as reflecting ornament.”

On this side each colour keeps to itself: red is red, green is green. On that side the colours give birth to one another.

Above the Trees There Is a Whole World Besides

Look upward, and there is more above the trees than there is in the trees themselves.

Nets of fine pearl spread over and cover the trees; upon each tree there are seven layers of net, and between each layer of net five hundred koṭis of palaces of fine flowers, like the palace of the great Brahmā King; within the palaces the youths of the gods are there of themselves; upon each youth there are five hundred koṭis of Shijiapilengqie maṇi jewels for necklaces; and the light of those maṇi jewels shines a hundred yojanas, as though a hundred koṭis of suns and moons had been joined together — they cannot be named one by one, and among the intermingled host of jewels their colour is the highest of all.

From tree to net, to palace, to youth, to necklace, to the light of the necklace — six levels, each smaller than the one above it, and the number at each level larger than the one above it. This is the fixed rule by which this sūtra writes of adornment: the finer it goes, the larger the numbers grow.

Flower and Fruit Do Not Grow from Within

There is a sentence of the commentators here that is easily passed over.

The sūtra says, “among the many leaves grow fine flowers, and upon the flowers there are of themselves fruits of the seven precious substances,” and the commentators gloss it: when flower and fruit open, they do not come forth from within.

On this side the flower is pushed open out of the bud and the fruit is set from the heart of the flower; both have a process that runs from inside outward. On that side there is no such process — because, the commentators say, Dharmākara’s practice in the causal stage was deep, and so they are there of themselves.

It is still the same single line: every one of the things seen there hangs upon the practice that one person once performed. The trees have no countable years and the flowers need no bud, because they were not grown.

Inside the Fruit the Ten Directions Appear

Look further down: leaf, flower, fruit.

Each leaf is exactly equal in length and breadth, twenty-five yojanas each; upon the leaves are a thousand colours and a hundred kinds of figuring, like the necklaces of the heavens. Among the leaves there are fine flowers besides, of the colour of Jambūnada gold, turning and turning among the leaves like a whirling wheel of fire.

Then from among them the fruits well up and are born, like the jeweled jar of Śakra.

The fruit sends out a great radiance, which becomes banners and pennants and measureless jeweled canopies. And it is within these jeweled canopies that —

“All the buddha-deeds of the three-thousandfold great-thousand world-system are reflected; and the buddha-lands of the ten directions appear within them as well.”

One leaf, one flower, one fruit; the fruit is transformed into a single canopy, and within that canopy appear all the buddha-deeds of the three-thousandfold great-thousand world-system, with the buddha-lands of the ten directions all inside it.

From the smallest place the largest is turned back out. All the way down the passage has been dividing into finer and finer parts, dividing as far as a single fruit; and here it suddenly turns its head, and one canopy holds the ten directions.

Among the gods and men of that land there is not one who does not see it.

Look Once More

When all of it has been seen, the sūtra says: “Once this tree has been seen, one should also contemplate it one by one in order.”

It has been seen, and still it must be looked at again — and looked at in order.

The readings handed down set that order out: first contemplate the root of the tree; next form the image of the trunk and the branches and on to the flowers and fruit; next the nets and the palaces; next the necklaces of the youths; next the size of the leaves and the light and colour of the flowers and fruit; next the pennants and canopies displaying the buddha-deeds at large. Whoever can contemplate them one by one in this order will find that nothing fails to be clear.

Six tiers of order, which take everything the sūtra has just said and walk it through again from the other end.

The first time the Buddha spoke it and you listened; the second time you go the road yourself. Having heard and having walked are made two different things in this contemplation.

And what the sūtra asks for as the sign of accomplishment is a single word: distinct. Trunk, branches, leaves, flowers, fruit — every one of them must be distinct.

It does not count as accomplished to see a blaze of golden splendour. It counts when each single thing can be told apart from the rest.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Tree

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same tree, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He gives ten topics, the fullest division this contemplation receives. The reckoning of the seven layers as forty-nine comes from him; so does the meaning that the trees flow forth from Amitābha’s outflow-free mind and that they neither grow old and die nor grow by degrees; so does the sentence that the image is for those not yet at ease in true contemplation; and the sixfold order in which the contemplation is accomplished is an article of the gate of practice that he alone provides. He also cites two hymns here: one saying, “Great compassion of the right path, born of world-transcending roots of good; its pure radiance is complete, like a mirror, like the orbs of sun and moon”; the other saying, “In Amitābha’s pure land the jeweled trees are many; on all four sides their twigs hang down, heavenly garments drape and wind about them” — turning a passage of scripture into something that can be chanted.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He explains this contemplation with the greatest brevity, giving only five items within the direct contemplation: clarifying the substance of the trees, clarifying the appearances of adornment, clarifying the manner of their growing, the manifesting of the buddha-lands, and the conclusion of the contemplation. On the seven layers, on non-arising, and on the order he says not a word. Yet there is one thing that only he has: for the name Shijiapilengqie he gives a rendering — Able and Holy. He writes that rendering later, at the tenth contemplation, the contemplation of Avalokiteśvara, because there this jewel-name occurs once again.

One line reads this single tree as a course of practice to be walked through in order; the other reads it as a set of sections to be marked out clearly, and one name to be rendered.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: once this tree has been seen, one should also contemplate it one by one in order.

八功德水想05 Contemplation of the Water of the Eight Excellent Qualities

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

第二觀也想水,第五觀又想水。

可是這兩處的水完全不是一回事。第二觀的水是借來的——借它的平,去比況那塊地;借完就變成氷、變成琉璃,退場了。第五觀的水是那個國土自己的水,八個池子,從一顆珠子裡流出來,流過花間、順著樹上下,一路走一路說法。

前一觀所觀的樹站著不動;這一觀所觀的水從頭動到尾。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把這一觀判作七段,稱它「寶池觀」;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》判作五段,稱它「池觀」。而經文自己標的名字是「八功德水想」。兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

有了樹,還缺一樣

「樹想成已,次當想水。」

為什麼樹之後是水?

古來的讀法答得很家常:寶樹雖然精妙,若沒有池水,也還算不得好。一來是為了不空這個世界,二來是為了莊嚴依報。

一個沒有水的地方,再好看也是乾的。這個判斷不高深,卻正是次序的理由。

而這一池水,和開頭那一觀的水還隔著一層。歷來的讀法把前六觀切作真假兩截:日想、水想、氷想是「假依」,那是此界之中相似可見的境;從琉璃地以下到寶樓為止是「真依」,那是彼國真實無漏可見的境。

前一觀的樹與這一觀的池,都落在真依這一截裡。借來的東西到氷想為止,自琉璃地以下所看的,是那個國土自己的。

水從一顆珠裡出來

「極樂國土有八池水。一一池水七寶所成;其寶柔軟從如意珠王生」。

這裡有一件事值得停下來:那水不是從地下湧出來的,也不是從天上落下來的,是從一顆如意珠王裡生出來的。

所以古來注家給它一個名字——如意水。

水既然從如意寶出,池岸又是七寶合成,寶光映徹通照,於是八德之水就同雜寶一樣的顏色。這就是它叫「寶水」的緣故。

那不是水裡放了寶,是寶變成了水。

至於「八功德」是哪八德,經文一個字都沒有列——那要到注家那裡才看得到,下文別有一節專說。

分成十四支

「分為十四支;一一支作七寶色。黃金為渠,渠下皆以雜色金剛以為底沙。」

八個池,分出十四支水渠。渠是黃金的,渠底鋪的是雜色金剛作沙。

古來的讀法在「金剛」二字上點了一句:金剛,就是無漏之體。

這是第二觀就出現過的一個判——那時是地下的金剛七寶金幢,這時是水渠底下的金剛沙。同一個字在兩處出現,說的是同一件事:那個國土的底子是無漏的。

而水分了十四支,並不亂。注家用四個字說它:異溜旋還。分開流,又轉回來。

水一路走,一路說話

「一一水中有六十億七寶蓮花,一一蓮華團圓正等十二由旬。其摩尼水流注華間,尋樹上下。」

摩尼,就是如意珠。

水在花與花之間流注,又順著樹上上下下。這一個「尋」字很有意思——水不是往低處走,是沿著樹爬。

然後是這一觀最特別的一句:

「其聲微妙,演說苦、空、無常、無我、諸波羅蜜,復有讚歎諸佛相好者。」

水聲在說法。

怎麼說的?注家分成兩處講:一處是寶水在花間流注,微波相觸就出妙聲,聲中都說妙法;一處是寶水上了岸,沿著樹的枝條花果葉子或上或下,中間相觸也都出妙聲,聲中都說妙法。

不是有人在水邊講經,是水自己碰到東西就出聲,出的聲就是法。

另外兩部同說極樂的經裡,也有七寶池,也有八功德水,可是在那裡演說法音的是眾鳥,不是水。此經把這件事分成前後兩截:水先說了,鳥還在後頭。

而所說的法還有層次:或說眾生的苦事,觸動菩薩的大悲,勸他去引導別人;或說人天等法,或說二乘等法,或說地前地上等法,或說佛地三身等法。

同一片水,對不同的人說不同的法。你站在哪一級,聽到的就是哪一級的話。

第二觀的風鼓樂器,說的是「苦、空、無常、無我」四個詞;這一觀的水,在那四個詞後面加了「諸波羅蜜」,再加上「讚歎諸佛相好」。從破執之法,走到行門之法,再走到所歸之佛。

八德是哪八德

經文說「八功德水」,卻一個字都沒有列出是哪八德。

要到注家那裡才看得到目。一家列的是:清淨潤澤、不臭、輕、冷、軟、美、飲時調適、飲已無患;另一家列的是:輕、清、冷、軟、美、不臭、飲時調適、飲已無患。次第不同,八件事大體是同一組。

而兩家都做了同一件事:把這八德一一配回到入裡去。屬色入的那一德,一家作清淨潤澤,一家只作一個清字;此外不臭屬香入,輕、冷、軟屬觸入,美屬味入,飲時調適與飲已無患屬法入。所配的五入,兩家全同。

另有一部同說極樂的經,不勞注家去補,經文自身就把八德的目列了出來:澄淨、清冷、甘美、輕軟、潤澤、安和,飲的時候除去飢渴等無量的過患,飲過以後能長養諸根四大。三處所列互有出入,今一併存之,不判哪一列才是定本。

這是把一池水拆成一堂功課。你去飲那口水的時候,眼睛得到的、鼻子得到的、身上得到的、舌頭得到的、乃至心裡得到的,各各分明。

我們這一邊的水也有這些,只是從來沒有人這樣分開來數過。

光化成鳥

最後一節,水又變了一次身分。

「從如意珠王踊出金色微妙光明,其光化為百寶色鳥,和鳴哀雅,常讚念佛、念法、念僧」。

那顆珠子前面生出八味之水,後面出種種金光;光又化成百寶顏色的鳥。鳥叫得和諧、哀婉、清雅,常常讚歎念佛、念法、念僧。

古來的讀法在此把三寶各釋了一句:佛是眾生無上的大師,能除邪向正;法是眾生無上的良藥,能斷煩惱的毒病,使法身清淨;僧是眾生無上的福田。

於是這一觀的走向就清楚了:從一顆珠出水,水說苦空無常無我;從同一顆珠出光,光化成鳥,鳥讚念佛念法念僧。

一頭是所破的,一頭是所歸的。中間是同一顆珠。

而那珠的作用,注家還補了一句:它不只是破暗除昏,所到之處都能施作佛事。

回頭把這一段的水一路數下來,動作是一串六個:生、分、注、尋、踊、化。水從珠裡生,分成十四支,注在花與花之間,尋著樹上上下下;光從同一顆珠裡踊出來,光又化成鳥。

六個字一個接一個,中間沒有一處是停的。那裡的莊嚴不是擺著給人看的一件件東西,是一路正在發生的事。

末後那十六個字

這一段收在一句話上,而這句話與第一觀的收尾一字不差:

「作是觀者,名為正觀。若他觀者,名為邪觀。」

所觀之境到這裡已經走得很遠——從一輪落日起,經過水、地、樹,到這八個池子;愈往後愈繁,六十億蓮花、十四支水渠、八種功德,數目一路往上加。而末後這句判語,一個字也沒有加。

古來注家分科,一家分七段,一家分五段,各自都收在總結之處,這一句不另立一科。經卻在一觀之後又一觀地把它重說一遍。

所觀的境愈換愈細,能不能算數的那一條,始終只是這十六個字。

承衍——兩副眼看同一池水

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一池水,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他判七科,稱此觀為寶池觀。樹後說池的兩個理由出於他;如意水、寶水二名的由來出於他;八德之目與五入之配屬出於他;水聲說法分花間與上岸兩處、所說之法開為四層,也出於他。他在此還寫了一首很長的讚,從八德寶池一路寫到寶宮樓、佛會、恒沙聖眾,末了收在一句願上:願此有緣常憶念,捨命同生彼法堂。而他在釋八德的時候特別說明:這八德之義,他已經在講《彌陀經》的地方廣說過了。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他判五科:池體、池相、隨心適意、利益、結觀。他的八德之目與善導所列次第略異而五入全同。而「摩尼」這個名字的翻譯只有他給了:如意珠。

善導叫這一觀寶池觀,智顗叫它池觀,而經自己叫它「八功德水想」。

而經自己只說了一句:其聲微妙。

The second contemplation also forms the image of water, and the fifth forms the image of water again.

But the water in the two places is not at all the same thing. The water of the second contemplation is borrowed — its levelness is borrowed in order to liken it to that ground; and once the loan has been made the water turns into ice, turns into beryl, and leaves the stage. The water of the fifth contemplation is that land’s own water: eight pools of it, flowing out of a single pearl, pouring in among the flowers, following the trees up and down, and speaking the Dharma all the way as it goes.

The trees of the contemplation before stand still and do not move; the water of this contemplation is in motion from beginning to end.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles divides this contemplation into seven segments and calls it the contemplation of the jeweled pools; Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life divides it into five and calls it the contemplation of the pools. And the name the sūtra itself marks is the image of the water of the eight excellent qualities. The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

The Trees Are There, and One Thing Is Still Missing

“Once the image of the trees has been accomplished, next one should form the image of the water.”

Why does water come after trees?

The readings handed down answer in the plainest household terms: fine and excellent as the jeweled trees are, without the water of pools they could still not be called good. First, that that land may not be empty; second, that the dependent recompense may be adorned.

A place with no water in it is dry, however handsome it may be. The judgment is not lofty, but it is exactly the reason for the order.

And this pool of water stands one layer away from the water of that opening contemplation. The readings handed down cut the first six contemplations into two lengths, the provisional and the true: the image of the sun, the image of water and the image of ice are the provisional support, objects of this world that resemble it and can be seen; from the beryl ground down to the jeweled towers is the true support, the real, outflow-free, visible objects of that land.

The trees of the contemplation before and the pools of this one both fall within that second length, the true support. What is borrowed goes as far as the image of ice; from the beryl ground onward, what is looked at belongs to that land itself.

The Water Comes Out of a Single Pearl

“In the land of Ultimate Bliss there are eight pools of water. Each pool of water is made of the seven precious substances; and that jewel is soft, and is born from the king of wish-fulfilling pearls.”

Here is something worth stopping over: that water does not well up from underground, nor does it fall from the sky; it is born out of a single king of wish-fulfilling pearls.

And so the commentators of old give it a name — wish-fulfilling water.

Since the water comes forth from the wish-fulfilling jewel, and since the banks of the pools are formed of the seven precious substances whose jewel-light shines through and illumines all, the water of the eight qualities takes on the very colour of the mingled jewels. That is why it is called jewel water.

It is not that jewels have been set in the water; it is that jewels have become the water.

As for which eight the eight excellent qualities are, the sūtra does not list one word of them — for that one must go to the commentators, and a section below is given to it alone.

Divided into Fourteen Branches

“It divides into fourteen branches, and each branch takes on the colour of the seven precious substances. Gold makes the channels, and beneath the channels adamant of mingled colours is used for the sand of their bed.”

Eight pools, dividing into fourteen branching channels. The channels are of gold, and what is laid on their beds is adamant of mingled colours for sand.

The readings handed down set a single remark upon the word adamant: adamant is the substance that is free of outflows.

That is a judgment which had already appeared in the second contemplation — there it was the adamantine banners of the seven precious substances beneath the ground, and here it is the adamantine sand beneath the water channels. The same word appearing in two places says the same thing: the underlying stuff of that land is free of outflows.

And though the water divides into fourteen branches, it is not in disorder. The commentators describe it in four words: separate courses that wind and return. They divide as they flow, and they turn back again.

The Water Goes on Its Way, and Speaks as It Goes

“In each pool of water there are sixty koṭis of lotus flowers of the seven precious substances, and each lotus flower is round and full, exactly equal in length and breadth, twelve yojanas each. The water formed of maṇi jewels pours in among the flowers and follows the trees up and down.”

Maṇi is the wish-fulfilling pearl.

The water pours in among the flowers, and also follows the trees up and down. That word “follows” is an interesting one — the water is not running downhill; it is climbing along the trees.

And then comes the most singular sentence in this contemplation:

“The sound of that water is subtle and wondrous, expounding suffering, emptiness, impermanence, non-self, and the perfections; and there are also those sounds that praise the marks and excellences of the buddhas.”

The sound of water is speaking the Dharma.

How is it spoken? The commentators divide it into two places: in one, the jewel water pours in among the flowers, and where its slight waves touch one another a wondrous sound comes forth, and in that sound the wondrous Dharma is spoken; in the other, the jewel water rises up the bank and follows the twigs, flowers, fruit and leaves of the trees, now up and now down, and where they touch in between a wondrous sound likewise comes forth, and in that sound the wondrous Dharma is spoken.

It is not that someone is expounding a sūtra at the water’s edge; it is that the water itself gives forth sound wherever it meets something, and the sound it gives forth is the Dharma.

In the other two sūtras that speak of Ultimate Bliss there are pools of the seven precious substances too, and water of the eight excellent qualities too; but there it is the flocks of birds that set forth the notes of the Dharma, not the water. This sūtra divides the matter into a before and an after: the water speaks first, and the birds are still to come.

And the Dharma spoken has its levels as well: now it speaks of the sufferings of sentient beings, stirring a bodhisattva’s great compassion and urging him to lead others; now of the dharmas of gods and men; now of the dharmas of the two vehicles; now of the dharmas before the grounds and upon the grounds; now of the dharmas of the ground of buddhahood and its three bodies.

One and the same sheet of water speaks a different Dharma to different people. Whatever step you stand on, that is the step whose words you hear.

The instruments sounded by the wind in the second contemplation spoke four terms: suffering, emptiness, impermanence, non-self. The water of this contemplation adds the perfections after those four, and then adds the praising of the marks and excellences of the buddhas. From the dharmas that break attachment, on to the dharmas of the gate of practice, and on to the Buddha who is the refuge.

Which Eight Are the Eight Qualities?

The sūtra says “water of the eight excellent qualities,” and does not list one word of which eight qualities they are.

For the list one must go to the commentators. One house lists them as: pure and moistening, without stench, light, cool, soft, sweet, harmonious and suitable when drunk, without ill once drunk. The other lists them as: light, clear, cool, soft, sweet, without stench, harmonious and suitable when drunk, without ill once drunk. The order differs; the eight items are broadly the same set.

And both houses do the same thing with them: they assign the eight qualities back, one by one, to the entries. For the quality gathered under the entry of form, one house has “pure and moistening” and the other only the single word “clear”; for the rest, without stench belongs to the entry of smell, light and cool and soft to the entry of touch, sweet to the entry of taste, and harmonious and suitable when drunk and without ill once drunk to the entry of dharmas. In the five entries to which they are assigned, the two houses agree entirely.

There is another sūtra that speaks of Ultimate Bliss which does not put the commentators to the trouble of supplying anything: its own text sets out the list of the eight qualities — clear and pure, clear and cool, sweet, light and soft, moistening, calm and harmonious; when drunk it removes hunger, thirst and measureless other troubles; and once drunk it can nourish the faculties and the four great elements. The three lists differ from one another item by item, and all are kept here together, with no judgment as to which list is the settled text.

This takes one pool of water apart into a course of study. When you go to drink that water, what the eyes get, what the nose gets, what the body gets, what the tongue gets, and even what the mind gets, are each of them distinct.

The water on this side has all of these too. It is only that nobody has ever counted them out separately in this way.

The Light Becomes Birds

In the last section the water changes its identity once more.

“From the king of wish-fulfilling pearls a golden, subtle and wondrous radiance wells up, and that light becomes birds of a hundred jewel-colours, which sing in harmony, their voices plaintive and pure, ever praising the recollection of the Buddha, the recollection of the Dharma, and the recollection of the Saṅgha.”

That pearl gives birth in front to the water of eight flavours and sends forth behind every kind of golden light; and the light in turn becomes birds of a hundred jewel-colours. The birds sing in harmony, plaintive and pure, ever praising the recollection of the Buddha, of the Dharma, and of the Saṅgha.

The readings handed down give one sentence to each of the Three Jewels here: the Buddha is the unsurpassed great master of sentient beings, able to remove what is wrong and turn beings toward the right; the Dharma is the unsurpassed good medicine of sentient beings, able to cut off the poisonous sickness of the afflictions and to make the dharma-body pure; the Saṅgha is the unsurpassed field of merit of sentient beings.

And so the direction of this contemplation becomes plain: out of one pearl comes water, and the water speaks suffering, emptiness, impermanence and non-self; out of the same pearl comes light, and the light becomes birds, and the birds praise the recollection of the Buddha, the Dharma and the Saṅgha.

One end is what is to be broken, the other is what is returned to. In the middle is the same pearl.

And the commentators add one more remark about what the pearl does: it does not merely break the dark and dispel the dim — wherever it reaches, it can perform the deeds of a buddha.

Count the water of this passage back through, and its actions make a string of six: born, divided, poured, following, welling, transformed. The water is born out of the pearl, divides into fourteen branches, pours in among the flowers, and follows the trees up and down; the light wells up out of that same pearl, and the light is transformed into birds.

Six words, one after another, with nowhere among them that anything stands still. The adornment there is not a set of objects laid out to be looked at; it is a course of events going on.

Those Sixteen Characters at the End

This passage closes on a single sentence, and the sentence does not differ by one character from the close of the first contemplation:

“To make this contemplation is called right contemplation; to make another contemplation is called wrong contemplation.”

The object contemplated has by now come a long way — from one setting sun, through water, ground and trees, to these eight pools; and the further it goes the more crowded it grows, with sixty koṭis of lotus flowers, fourteen branching channels, eight excellent qualities, the numbers rising all the way. And to this closing judgment not one word has been added.

The commentators of old divided the outline, one into seven segments and one into five, and each of them ended at the general conclusion, setting up no separate topic for this sentence. The sūtra, however, says it over again after one contemplation and after the next.

The objects contemplated grow finer with every exchange; the one line on which it all counts or fails to count is still only those sixteen characters.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Pool of Water

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same pool of water, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He gives seven topics and calls this the contemplation of the jeweled pools. The two reasons why the pools are taught after the trees come from him; so do the derivations of the names wish-fulfilling water and jewel water; so does the list of the eight qualities with its assignment to the five entries; and so does the division of the water’s speaking of the Dharma into the two places, among the flowers and up on the bank, with the Dharma spoken opened into four levels. He also writes a long hymn here, running from the jeweled pools of the eight qualities all the way to the jeweled palaces and towers, the assemblies of the buddhas and the holy hosts as many as the sands of the Gaṅgā, and closing on a vow: may those with this affinity keep it ever in mind, and when life is laid down be born together in that Dharma hall. And in glossing the eight qualities he states expressly that he has already expounded the meaning of these eight at length where he taught the Amitābha Sūtra.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He gives five topics: the substance of the pools, the appearance of the pools, following the mind and suiting its wish, the benefit, and the conclusion of the contemplation. His list of the eight qualities differs slightly in order from Shandao’s while agreeing entirely in the five entries. And the rendering of the name maṇi is given by him alone: the wish-fulfilling pearl.

Shandao calls this the contemplation of the jeweled pools, Zhiyi calls it the contemplation of the pools, and the sūtra calls it the image of the water of the eight excellent qualities.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: the sound of that water is subtle and wondrous.

總觀想06 The General Contemplation

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

前五觀一路看下來:日、水、地、樹、池。到第六觀,經文說了一個新東西——樓,然後說了一句舊話:

「此想成已,名為粗見極樂世界寶樹、寶地、寶池」。

看的是樓,成就的卻是樹、地、池。

這一觀因此叫「總觀想」。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把它判作十一段,稱它「寶樓觀」——取所看的那樣東西為名;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》判作四段,稱它「總觀」——取所收的那件事為名。兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

有了池,還缺一樣

第五觀之後為什麼要有樓?

古來的讀法用的是和上一觀同樣的句法:淨土雖然有寶流灌注,若沒有寶樓宮閣,也還算不得精妙;為此依報的莊嚴要種種圓備。

樹想那裡說「若無池水,亦未名好」,池想這裡說「若無寶樓宮閣亦未為精」——一路都是『還缺一樣』。

到這一觀說完,缺的補齊了。

樓有多少

「眾寶國土,一一界上有五百億寶樓」。

注家把這句拆成兩件事:「一一界上」說的是樓的住處——地界遍滿那個國土,樓也就無窮無盡;「有五百億」說的是數——一處地界之上既然如此,遍滿那個國土也都是這樣。

這個算法很值得注意。它不是說那裡總共有五百億座樓,是說每一處地界上都有五百億座,而地界遍滿全國。

前面第二觀的地是一整片,這裡把那一整片重新分成無數「界」,每一界上再放五百億。

樓裡面,和樓外面

「其樓閣中有無量諸天,作天伎樂。又有樂器懸處虛空,如天寶幢不鼓自鳴。」

注家在此分了內外:樓閣之中是「閣內莊嚴」,懸在空中的樂器是「樓外莊嚴」。

裡面是諸天在奏樂——有人在演奏。

外面是樂器懸在虛空,像天上的寶幢一樣,不用敲打自己就響——沒有人在演奏。

而這裡有一級臺階,是接著第二觀來的。第二觀說:「八種清風從光明出,鼓此樂器」。那時樂器要響,還得有風來鼓。到這一觀,連風都不必了。

從有所待,到無所待。注家用五個字說它:無思成自事。不用起心,事情自己成。

而同一句裡還有四個字:晝夜六時。

那個響不是一場有起有訖的演奏。外面這一邊連奏的人都沒有,也就沒有開始與停下的時候——聲流法響,晝夜六時,一直是那樣。

沒有心識的東西在說法

這一段舉境只用了三個「有」字:有五百億寶樓,有無量諸天,又有樂器。由物,而人,而器——三舉就止住,底下便轉入觀成與利益。

而說法之能,經文給的是這三者裡最末、最不像能自己說法的那一個。

「此眾音中,皆說念佛、念法、念比丘僧。」

注家在這裡下了一句很直的判:樂器雖然沒有心識,卻有說法的能力。

這是這部經一路積累下來的一件事。第二觀是風鼓樂器演苦空無常無我,第五觀是水流過花間碰到東西就出聲、聲中皆說妙法,這一觀是樂器不鼓自鳴而說三念。

在那個國土裡,說法的不限於有情。風、水、樂器,凡是會響的都在說;你走到哪裡,都有聲音在說法。而所說的話,一路從「苦、空、無常、無我」走到「念佛、念法、念比丘僧」。

破執的話說在前面,所歸的話說在後面。

看一樣,成一片

「此想成已,名為粗見極樂世界寶樹、寶地、寶池」。

注家釋這一句釋得很細:專心住在所觀之境上,希望見到的是寶樓;剋念不移,結果是從地以上的莊嚴全部現前。

所希見者只有一樣,所現者是全體。

這就是「總」的意思。不是把前面五觀重看一遍,是看好這一樣,前面的自己都在。

而經文用的詞仍舊是「粗見」——第三觀說「粗見極樂國地」,這裡說「粗見極樂世界寶樹、寶地、寶池」。

所見的東西多了,稱呼還是粗。

分量在增加,判語不肯放鬆。那個「了了分明,不可具說」的一層,經文從第三觀說過一次以後,就一直留在前面等著。

「粗」究竟粗在哪裡,古來的讀法在地想那一觀裡答過:凝心不絕就見到淨土之相,這一種叫「想心中見」——之所以仍稱粗,是因為「猶有覺想」。

見是真見了,只是這一見還在想心之內,還帶著想的那一分。

「粗」不是說所見的境不足,是說能見的心還在想。看得再多、成得再整片,只要仍是想成的,這個稱呼就不改。

「總」不是省事

看樓就能成就樹、地、池——那前面幾觀豈不是白看了?

不是。

前面五觀是一樣一樣立起來的:地立住了,樹才有地方站;樹立住了,池才不算空;池立住了,樓才不算缺。到這一觀,所有立起來的東西同時在場,而所觀的只是最後加上去的那一樣。

總不是把五件事壓成一件,是五件事已經在了,你只要看住第六件。

我們讀到這裡容易鬆一口氣,覺得依報說完了。而經文接著給的不是收工,是一個更大的數目。

除無量億劫極重惡業

「若見此者,除無量億劫極重惡業,命終之後必生彼國。」

第三觀說的是「除八十億劫生死之罪」,有數目;這一觀說的是「無量億劫極重惡業」,沒有數目,卻加了「極重」二字。

注家把利益釋作一條線:依著法去觀察,除去多劫的障;障除了,這個身器就清淨;清淨了,就與佛的本心相應;相應了,捨此身到他世必定往生,沒有疑問。

除障——身器清淨——應佛本心——必往。四步,一步扣一步。

滅罪在這裡仍舊不是落點。落點是「應佛本心」。

往生說得這樣斷然——「必生彼國」,句中沒有留轉圜的餘地——所繫的並不是罪除得多,而是應佛本心這一步落了地;落地了,捨此身到他世,才說得出那個「必」字。

一段結束了

依報到這一觀為止。

古來的讀法在玄義分裡把整個依報切過:從日觀到華座觀是依報;其中華座那一觀是「別依」,唯屬彌陀佛;其餘六觀是「通依」,屬法界的凡聖,凡是得生的人共同受用。

所以這一觀是通依的最後一觀。

而這六觀之內還有第二道切法:日想、水想、氷想是「假依」,因為那是這個世界裡相似可見的境;自琉璃地以下到這一觀,才是「真依」——那個國土真實無漏的可見之相。

於是這一觀之末所收的不只是一組莊嚴。從借來的境走到那個國土自己的境,這一段路也在這裡走完了。

前面六觀所看的地、樹、池、樓,是所有往生的人共用的;下一觀要看的那朵蓮花座,是佛一個人的。

經文走到這裡,把『大家的』說完了,才開始說『佛的』。

承衍——兩副眼看同一座樓

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一座樓,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他判十一科,是定善前六觀中科目最多的一觀。他稱此觀為寶樓觀,取所觀之物為名。樓的住處與數之分、閣內樓外之分、「無思成自事」一語、「樂雖無識,即有說法之能」一判、觀成之相「悕見寶樓,剋念不移,自上莊嚴總現」——皆出於他。而通依別依、真依假依的整幅架構也出於他:本觀正是真依之終、通依之末。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他稱此觀為總觀,取所收之義為名,並且把「總」所攝的東西明明列出:初寶樓、二樹、三地、四池——四事。經文所舉是寶樹、寶地、寶池三事,他把所觀的寶樓也算進去,成四。他的十六觀總目裡,這一觀寫作「總觀觀一切樓地池等」,同一個算法。

一路以所見之物命名,一路以所攝之義命名;而經自己標的是「總觀想」。

而經自己只說了一句:不鼓自鳴。

The first five contemplations run straight through: the sun, the water, the ground, the trees, the pools. At the sixth the sūtra names something new — the towers — and then says something old:

“When this image has been accomplished, it is called having roughly seen the jeweled trees, the jeweled ground, and the jeweled pools of the world of Ultimate Bliss.”

What is looked at is the towers, and what is accomplished is the trees, the ground, and the pools.

This contemplation is therefore called “the general image.”

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles divides it into eleven segments and calls it “the contemplation of the jeweled towers” — naming it from the thing looked at. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life divides it into four and calls it “the general contemplation” — naming it from the matter it gathers in. The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

There Are Pools Now, and One Thing Is Still Missing

Why must there be towers after the fifth contemplation?

The readings handed down use the same turn of phrase as at the contemplation before: though the pure land has jeweled streams pouring through it, without jeweled towers and palace pavilions it is still not called fine; for this reason the adornment of the dependent recompense is to be complete in every kind.

At the image of the trees it was said, “without the water of the pools it would still not be called good”; here at the image of the pools it is said, “without jeweled towers and palace pavilions it is still not fine” — all the way along, one thing is still missing.

By the end of this contemplation, what was missing has been filled in.

How Many Towers

“In the land formed of many jewels, upon each and every tract of ground there are five hundred koṭis of jeweled towers.”

The commentators split this sentence into two matters. “Upon each and every tract of ground” states where the towers stand: the tracts of ground extend throughout that land, and so the towers too are without end. “There are five hundred koṭis” states the number: since it is so upon a single tract of ground, so it is throughout that land as well.

The reckoning deserves notice. It does not say that there are five hundred koṭis of towers in that land all told; it says that upon each and every tract of ground there are five hundred koṭis, and that the tracts of ground extend throughout the land.

The ground of the second contemplation was one single expanse. Here that single expanse is divided again into countless “tracts,” and upon each tract five hundred koṭis are set.

Inside the Towers, and Outside Them

“Within those towered pavilions are measureless gods, making celestial music. There are also musical instruments hanging in space, like the jewel banners of the heavens, sounding of themselves without being struck.”

The commentators divide inside from outside here: what is within the towered pavilions is “the adornment inside the pavilions,” and the instruments hanging in the air are “the adornment outside the towers.”

Inside, the gods are making music — there are players.

Outside, the instruments hang in space, like the jewel banners of the heavens, and sound of themselves without being struck — there are no players.

And there is a step here, taken up from the second contemplation. The second said, “eight kinds of pure wind issue from the light and strike these instruments.” There the instruments had to have wind to strike them before they would sound. By this contemplation not even the wind is needed.

From having something to depend on, to depending on nothing. The commentators say it in five words: “with no thought raised, the thing accomplishes itself.” Nothing has to set the mind going; the matter completes itself.

And in the same sentence there are four more words: through the six periods of day and night.

That sounding is not a performance with a beginning and an end. On the outer side there is not even anyone playing, and so there is no moment of starting and no moment of stopping — the sound streams forth the tones of the Dharma through the six periods of day and night, and is always so.

Things Without Consciousness Are Speaking the Dharma

This passage raises its objects with three occurrences of the word “are”: there are five hundred koṭis of jeweled towers, there are measureless gods, there are also musical instruments. From things, to persons, to instruments — three raisings and it stops, and below that the text turns to the accomplishing of the contemplation and to the benefit.

And the power of speaking the Dharma the sūtra gives to the last of these three, the one least likely to speak of itself.

“Among these many sounds, all speak of recollecting the Buddha, recollecting the Dharma, recollecting the saṅgha of bhikṣus.”

The commentators set down a blunt judgment here: “the music, though it has no consciousness, yet has the power to speak the Dharma.”

This is something the sūtra has been accumulating all along. In the second contemplation the wind struck the instruments and they set forth suffering, emptiness, impermanence, and non-self; in the fifth the water flowed among the flowers and gave out sound wherever it met something, and in those sounds the wondrous Dharma was spoken; in this one the instruments sound of themselves without being struck and speak the three recollections.

In that land, what speaks the Dharma is not confined to what has feeling. Wind, water, instruments: whatever can sound is speaking; wherever you go, there is sound speaking the Dharma. And what is spoken runs from “suffering, emptiness, impermanence, and non-self” through to “recollecting the Buddha, recollecting the Dharma, recollecting the saṅgha of bhikṣus.”

The words that break attachment come first; the words that name what is turned toward come after.

Look at One Thing; a Whole Expanse Appears

“When this image has been accomplished, it is called having roughly seen the jeweled trees, the jeweled ground, and the jeweled pools of the world of Ultimate Bliss.”

The commentators gloss this sentence closely: “dwelling single-mindedly upon the object, hoping to see the jeweled towers, holding the thought fast without shifting, all the adornments from the ground upward appear together.”

What is hoped for is one thing only; what appears is the whole.

This is what “general” means. It is not looking through the earlier five contemplations a second time; it is looking well at this one thing, whereupon everything before it is already there.

And the word the sūtra uses is still “roughly seen” — the third contemplation said “roughly seen the ground of the land of Ultimate Bliss,” and here it says “roughly seen the jeweled trees, the jeweled ground, and the jeweled pools of the world of Ultimate Bliss.”

What is seen has grown, and the name for it is still rough.

The weight increases and the verdict refuses to slacken. That layer of “clear and distinct, beyond the telling” the sūtra stated once at the third contemplation and has left standing up ahead ever since.

Where “rough” lies the readings handed down answered at the image of the ground: when the mind is gathered without a break one sees the appearance of the pure land, and this is called “seeing within the imaging mind” — the reason it is still called rough is that “awareness and imaging are still there.”

Seen it truly is; only this seeing is still within the imaging mind, and still carries that portion of imaging with it.

“Rough” does not say that the object seen falls short; it says that the mind that sees is still imaging. However much more is seen and however whole the expanse becomes, so long as it is accomplished by imaging the name does not change.

“General” Is Not a Short Cut

If looking at the towers accomplishes the trees, the ground, and the pools, were the earlier contemplations then looked at for nothing?

They were not.

The five before were set up one at a time: once the ground stood, the trees had somewhere to stand; once the trees stood, the pools were not empty; once the pools stood, the towers were not lacking. By this contemplation everything that has been set up is present at once, and what is contemplated is only the last thing added.

“General” does not press five matters into one; the five are already there, and you have only to hold the sixth in view.

Reading this far one is inclined to breathe out and feel that the dependent recompense has been told. But what the sūtra gives next is not a closing of the work. It is a larger number.

Removing the Gravest Evil Karma of Measureless Koṭis of Kalpas

“If one sees these, the gravest evil karma of measureless koṭis of kalpas is removed, and after the end of this life one will surely be born in that land.”

The third contemplation said “the offences of eighty koṭis of kalpas of birth-and-death,” and gave a number; this one says “the gravest evil karma of measureless koṭis of kalpas,” gives no number, and adds two words: “the gravest.”

The commentators gloss the benefit as a single line: “observing according to the method removes the obstructions of many kalpas; the vessel of the body being pure, it accords with the Buddha’s fundamental mind, and casting off the body for another world one will surely go there, beyond doubt.”

Obstruction removed — the vessel of the body pure — in accord with the Buddha’s fundamental mind — bound to go. Four steps, each hooked to the one before.

The extinction of offences is still not where this lands. Where it lands is “according with the Buddha’s fundamental mind.”

Birth in that land is stated so flatly — “one will surely be born in that land,” with no room left in the sentence for turning aside — because what it hangs on is not how many offences were removed, but whether that step of according with the Buddha’s fundamental mind has come to ground. Once it has, then and only then, casting off this body for another world, can that word “surely” be spoken.

One Stretch Comes to an End

The dependent recompense goes as far as this contemplation.

In the Section on the Profound Meaning the readings handed down cut the whole of the dependent recompense: from the contemplation of the sun to the contemplation of the Flower Throne is the dependent recompense; among these the contemplation of the Flower Throne is “the particular support,” belonging to Amitābha alone, while the other six contemplations are “the common support,” belonging to the ordinary beings and sages of the dharma-realm and used in common by all who gain birth there.

So this contemplation is the last of the common support.

And within those six there is a second cut: the image of the sun, the image of water, and the image of ice are “the provisional support,” because they are objects of this world that resemble it and can be seen; while from the beryl ground down to this contemplation is “the true support” — the real, outflow-free, visible appearances of that land.

What is gathered up at the end of this contemplation is therefore not one set of adornments only. The road from a borrowed object to that land’s own object has also been walked to its end here.

The ground, trees, pools, and towers looked at in these six contemplations are used in common by everyone born there; the Flower Throne to be looked at in the next belongs to the Buddha alone.

The sūtra, having come this far, finishes what belongs to everyone before it begins on what belongs to the Buddha.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Tower

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same tower, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He marks out eleven items, more than for any other of the first six contemplations of the good done in concentration. He calls this the contemplation of the jeweled towers, naming it from the thing contemplated. The division between where the towers stand and how many they are, the division of inside the pavilions from outside the towers, the phrase “with no thought raised, the thing accomplishes itself,” the judgment that “the music, though it has no consciousness, yet has the power to speak the Dharma,” and the sign of accomplishment — “hoping to see the jeweled towers, holding the thought fast without shifting, all the adornments from the ground upward appear together” — all come from him. So too does the whole frame of common and particular support, true and provisional support: this contemplation is precisely the end of the true support and the last of the common.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He calls this the general contemplation, naming it from the matter it gathers, and he lists plainly what “general” takes in: “first the jeweled towers, second the trees, third the ground, fourth the pools” — four matters. The sūtra raises three, the jeweled trees, the jeweled ground, and the jeweled pools; he counts in the jeweled towers that are contemplated and makes four. In his general list of the sixteen contemplations this one is written as “the general contemplation, contemplating all the towers, ground, pools, and the rest” — the same reckoning.

One line names it from the thing seen, the other from the meaning it takes in; and the sūtra marks it of itself as “the general image.”

And the sūtra itself has said only this: sounding of themselves without being struck.

花座想07 Contemplation of the Flower Throne

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

前六觀看的是地、是水、是樹、是池、是樓——一片國土的模樣。到第七觀,經文忽然停下來,重新說了一次「諦聽,諦聽」。

十六觀之中,只有這一觀是這樣重起的。善導《觀經四帖疏》把這一觀分作十九句,是全經分句最細的一段;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》則把這一觀總標作「明佛身」,說佛答夫人之請開出五種觀門——華座、像、佛身、觀音、勢至——本經第七至第十一這五觀,在他那裡是一科之下的五扇門。兩家所判的統攝不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

話還沒說完,佛就來了

經文說:「說是語時,無量壽佛住立空中,觀世音、大勢至,是二大士侍立左右。」

釋迦牟尼佛正在王宮裡說話,話說到一半,無量壽佛就出現在空中了。

這一句寫得極快。前面沒有請、沒有等、沒有『爾時世尊入某某三昧』,只是「說是語時」——說這話的時候。此方的佛為眾生的緣故,把心住到西方去;那一位知道了,影子就臨到東邊來。兩位世尊應機並無二致,只是一個顯、一個隱。

為什麼是站著

古來注家在這裡設了一問,問得很不客氣:佛的德那樣尊高,不該輕易舉動;既然肯不捨本願、應大悲而來,為什麼不端端正正坐著來?

答是:如來另有密意。

娑婆是苦界,種種惡雜居在一處,八種苦一齊燒著;一動就成違逆,笑臉裡藏著詐親,六賊時時跟著,三惡道的火坑就在腳邊,眼看要掉下去。這種時候,若不抬腳去救,那個業繫的牢,人靠自己怎麼出得來。

所以是「立撮即行」——站著,一把撈起就走,來不及坐下。

這一句話把整部經的急迫寫盡了。佛的姿勢,是被眾生的處境決定的。

而站著來的那一位身邊,只有兩位侍者:觀世音與大勢至。沒有帶別的大眾——這是表「無餘眾」,來的人數就是這件事的重量。

她問的不是自己

韋提希見到了。她頂禮到佛足前,說的第一句是:「我今因佛力故,得見無量壽佛及二菩薩」

先認自己是靠佛力見的。

然後她問:「未來眾生,當云何觀無量壽佛及二菩薩?」

她問的不是『我怎麼觀』。她已經看見了,站在她面前的就是。她問的是後來那些看不見的人。

序分的最後一問也是這樣:「若佛滅後,諸眾生等,濁惡不善,五苦所逼,云何當見阿彌陀佛極樂世界?」一部經裡,這個人問了兩次同樣性質的問題,兩次都不是為自己問。歷來的讀法把這兩處都拿來作證,說這十六觀法本來就是為常沒的眾生說的,不干大小聖人的事。

佛先教的,是座

問的是「當云何觀無量壽佛」,佛答的卻是:「欲觀彼佛者,當起想念,於七寶地上作蓮花想」

要觀佛,先觀佛坐的那個座。

前六觀所看的地、水、樹、池、樓,是往生的人共同受用的,所以叫通依;唯有這一座,是那一位佛獨坐的,叫別依。整部經到這裡,鏡頭第一次從『大家的國土』收到『祂一個人的座位』。

而佛還是沒有直接給那個身。先給座,再給像,再給真身——第七、第八、第九三觀是一級一級走上去的。

一片葉子上有八萬四千條脈

這一段的鋪陳極盡繁複。

蓮花的每一片葉子現出上百種寶色,葉上有八萬四千條脈,像天上畫的;每一條脈有八萬四千道光。最小的一片葉子,縱橫二百五十由旬;這樣的大葉有八萬四千片。葉與葉之間有百億顆摩尼珠王,每一顆放千道光,光合成一頂七寶的蓋,蓋住整片地。臺上有四根寶幢,每一根像百千萬億座須彌山。幢上的寶珠又各有八萬四千道光,每一道光現八萬四千種金色,每一種金色遍滿寶土,變成金剛臺、真珠網、雜花雲。

數目一路往上翻,讀著幾乎要暈。

但經文最後收在一句極小的話上:「皆令分明,如於鏡中自見面像。」

拿鏡子照自己的臉——那是最不費力、最尋常的一種看見。億萬重的莊嚴,驗收的標準只是這個。

只觀方寸一尺

那麼這樣繁複的東西,一個人要怎麼下手?

行門裡說得很實在:一開始不可以亂想多境,那樣定不下來;只觀方寸一尺,就這麼大。

所觀的境愈廣,心愈接不住。所以先把它縮到你守得住的大小——不是那朵花變小了,是下手處本來就只能這麼大。

要多久?或者一天、兩天、三天,或者四天五天六天七天,或者一個月、一年、兩三年。不論白天黑夜,行住坐臥,身口意三業常與定相合。

然後是最重的一句:萬事都得捨掉,捨到像個丟了魂的聾子瞎子癡人一樣,這個定才容易得。若不這樣,三業隨著緣頭轉,定想跟著波浪飛,縱使活滿一千歲,法眼也不曾開過。

『像個丟了魂的聾子瞎子癡人』——這個比方不好聽,卻誠實。它說的不是修行的姿態多好看,是萬緣真捨了沒有。

兩種見

見到了以後,還有一道分別。

一種叫想見:心裡還有知覺在,雖然見到淨境,並不十分明了。

另一種是內外的覺都滅了,那時進入正受三昧,所見的淨境就不是想見了——到這一步,才有得比。

這一分很要緊。它把『我好像看見了』和『見到了』分成兩件事,而分界不在境的美醜,在那個能知能覺的你還在不在。

這座是一個願變出來的

全段將結,佛又叫了一次阿難,補了一句來歷:「如此妙花,是本法藏比丘願力所成」。

法藏比丘是誰?是那一位佛因地的名字。他在世自在王佛所發了大願,願成之後才有這一座。

所以這朵花不是天生長在那裡的。它是一個人發過的願,長成了現在這個樣子。

我們讀前面那一大段莊嚴,讀的是相;讀到這一句,才知道那些相從哪裡來——每一片葉子、每一道光,都是願的形狀

末後兩句仍是那把老尺:「作是觀者,名為正觀。若他觀者,名為邪觀。」

從第一觀立下的判準,到這裡一字未改。

承衍——兩副眼看同一座蓮花

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一座蓮花,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把這一觀分作十九句,逐句坐實:三尊現前之義出於他——娑婆化主住想西方、安樂慈尊影臨東域,「二尊許應無異,直以隱顯有殊」;佛何以立而不坐之問答出於他,答在「立撮即行,不及端坐以赴機也」;觀法之全式也出於他——先於佛像前至心懺悔、發露所造之罪,心口請釋迦與十方諸佛,念彌陀本願而後入觀,向西跏趺,徐徐轉心,唯觀方寸一尺,日、月、年而不限;想見與正受之辨,亦是他所分。在他,華座一觀是「別依」,唯屬彌陀,與前六觀之通依判然有別。全觀他以四句收之:「斯乃華依寶地,葉間奇珍,臺瑩四幢,光施佛事。」

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他不把這一觀單列,而是總標「明佛身」,其下四科:勅聽許說、明佛現身相、為未來請、酬請廣明佛身;末一科開出五種觀門,華座是第一門,像、佛身、觀音、勢至是其後四門。華座門中他分五科:明成座法用并辯其相、明能隨機利物、結觀、明由願力所成、明觀未來有利益。他於行法不設細目,於三尊現前不設問答,唯以科文貫之,重在座由願成、觀有利益二事。

一路把這一座讀成行門的入手處,量到坐姿、時節與心相之真偽;一路把它讀成佛身五門之首,量到科文的統攝與利益的歸屬。

而經自己只說了一句:如此妙花,是本法藏比丘願力所成。

What the first six contemplations looked at was the ground, the water, the trees, the pools, the towers — the look of a whole land. At the seventh the sūtra suddenly halts and says once more, “Listen closely, listen closely.”

Among the sixteen contemplations, this is the only one that begins again in this way. Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles divides this contemplation into nineteen sentences, the finest division of any passage in the sūtra; Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life marks the whole of it as “clarifying the Buddha’s body,” and says that in answering the lady’s request the Buddha opens five gates of contemplation — the Flower Throne, the image, the Buddha’s body, Avalokiteśvara, Mahāsthāmaprāpta — so that the seventh through the eleventh contemplations of this sūtra are, for him, five doors beneath a single item of the outline. The two houses gather them differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

The Sentence Was Not Finished, and the Buddha Came

The sūtra says: “While he was speaking these words, the Buddha of Measureless Life stood in the air, with Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta, those two great beings, attending on his left and right.”

Śākyamuni Buddha is speaking in the royal palace, and halfway through the speaking the Buddha of Measureless Life appears in the air.

The sentence is written at great speed. There is no request beforehand, no waiting, no “then the World-Honored One entered such and such a samādhi” — only “while he was speaking these words.” The Buddha of this quarter, for the sake of sentient beings, settles his thought upon the west; the one over there knows it, and his shadow draws near to the eastern region. The two World-Honored Ones answer what is before them with no difference at all; it is only that one is manifest and one is hidden.

Why Standing

The commentators of old set a question here, and it is not a polite one: the Buddha’s virtue is so honored and lofty that he ought not to stir lightly; and since he is willing not to abandon his original vow and to come in answer to great compassion, why does he not sit properly to meet what is before him?

The answer is that the Tathāgata has a hidden intent of his own.

The Sahā world is a realm of suffering, where sundry evils dwell mixed together and eight kinds of suffering burn all at once; a movement turns into an offence, deceit hides inside a smiling face, the six thieves follow at every moment, and the fire pit of the three evil destinies is underfoot, on the very edge of swallowing one. At such a time, if he does not raise his foot to rescue the lost, how by his own strength is anyone to get out of the prison of karmic bondage?

And so it is “he stands, snatches them up, and is off” — there is no time to sit down.

That one sentence writes out the urgency of the whole sūtra. The Buddha’s posture is decided by the situation of sentient beings.

And beside the one who comes standing there are only two attendants, Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta. No other assembly is brought — this shows that “there is no remaining company”; the number of those who come is the weight of the matter.

What She Asks Is Not for Herself

Vaidehī has seen. She bows her head to his feet, and her first words are: “It is by the Buddha’s power that I have now been able to see the Buddha of Measureless Life and the two bodhisattvas.”

First she acknowledges that it is by the Buddha’s power that she sees.

Then she asks: “How are the sentient beings of the future to contemplate the Buddha of Measureless Life and the two bodhisattvas?”

She does not ask how am I to contemplate. She has already seen; he is standing before her. What she asks about is those who come later and cannot see.

The last question of the introduction was of the same kind: “if, after the Buddha has passed away, sentient beings are turbid, evil, and not good, and are pressed by the five sufferings, how are they to see Amitābha Buddha and the world of Ultimate Bliss?” In one sūtra this person asks the same kind of question twice, and neither time is it asked for herself. The readings handed down take both places as proof that these sixteen methods of contemplation were spoken from the first for beings constantly submerged, and have nothing to do with sages great or small.

What the Buddha Teaches First Is the Throne

What was asked is “how are they to contemplate the Buddha of Measureless Life,” and what the Buddha answers is: “Whoever wishes to contemplate that Buddha should raise up this thought and image: upon the ground of the seven precious substances, form the image of a lotus flower.”

To contemplate the Buddha, first contemplate the seat the Buddha sits on.

The ground, water, trees, pools, and towers of the first six contemplations are used in common by all who gain birth in that land, and are therefore called “the common support”; this Flower Throne alone is the seat on which that one Buddha sits, and is called “the particular support.” Here for the first time in the whole sūtra the view narrows from everyone’s land to his own seat.

And the Buddha still does not hand over the body directly. First the throne, then the image, then the true body — the seventh, eighth, and ninth contemplations climb one step at a time.

Eighty-Four Thousand Veins on a Single Leaf

The elaboration of this passage is extreme.

Each leaf of the lotus flower takes on the colours of a hundred jewels; on the leaf are eighty-four thousand veins, as though drawn by the heavens; each vein has eighty-four thousand rays of light. The smallest leaf is two hundred and fifty yojanas across and along; great leaves such as these are eighty-four thousand. Between leaf and leaf are a hundred koṭis of maṇi-pearl kings, each giving out a thousand rays of light, and the light joins into a canopy of the seven precious substances that covers the whole ground. Upon the dais stand four jeweled banners, each like a hundred thousand myriad koṭis of Mount Sumeru. The jeweled pearls upon the banners have again eighty-four thousand rays of light apiece, each ray making eighty-four thousand kinds of golden colour, each golden colour filling that jeweled land and turning into adamantine daises, nets of fine pearl, clouds of mingled flowers.

The numbers turn upward the whole way, until reading them makes the head swim.

But the sūtra closes at the last upon the smallest of sentences: “all are to be made distinct, as one sees one’s own face in a mirror.”

Holding up a mirror to one’s own face — that is the least laborious and most ordinary kind of seeing there is. Koṭis upon koṭis of adornment, and the whole test is that.

Contemplate Only a Square Inch, a Single Foot

How, then, is anyone to lay hold of a thing so elaborate?

The gate of practice speaks very plainly: at the outset one may not image many objects in disorder, for then concentration cannot be reached; contemplate only a square inch, a single foot — no more than that.

The wider the object contemplated, the less the mind can catch it. So it is first shrunk to a size you can hold — not that the flower has become small, but that the place where one lays hold can only ever be this size.

For how long? Perhaps a day, two days, three days; perhaps four, five, six, seven days; perhaps a month, a year, two or three years. Day or night, walking, standing, sitting, or lying, the three activities of body, speech, and mind are constantly to be joined with concentration.

Then comes the heaviest sentence of all: everything must be let go of, let go until one is like a deaf, blind, foolish person who has lost his wits, and then this concentration comes easily. Otherwise the three activities turn with whatever comes along, the settled image flies off after the waves, and though one lived out a thousand years the Dharma eye would never once have opened.

Like a deaf, blind, foolish person who has lost his wits — the comparison is not flattering, but it is honest. What it speaks of is not how well practice is carried; it is whether the myriad entanglements have really been let go.

Two Kinds of Seeing

Once there has been seeing, a further distinction remains.

One kind is called seeing by way of the image: awareness is still there within, and though the pure object is seen it is not greatly clear.

In the other, awareness within and without has been extinguished; then one enters the samādhi of right reception, and the pure object seen is no longer a seeing by way of the image — only at that step is there anything to compare with.

This distinction matters. It makes I seem to have seen and it has been seen into two different things, and the line between them is drawn not by how fine the object is, but by whether the one who knows and is aware is still standing there.

This Throne Was Brought Forth by a Vow

As the passage closes the Buddha calls Ānanda once more and adds a word about where it came from: “A wondrous flower such as this was accomplished by the power of the vow of the bhikṣu Dharmākara of old.”

Who is the bhikṣu Dharmākara? He is that Buddha’s name in the causal stage. He made great vows in the presence of the Buddha World-Sovereign King, and only when the vows were fulfilled was there this throne.

So this flower did not grow there of its own accord. It is a vow that a person once made, grown into what it now is.

Reading the long passage of adornment before, we read appearances; only at this sentence do we learn where those appearances came from — every leaf, every ray of light, is the shape of a vow.

The last two sentences are still the old measuring rod: “To make this contemplation is called right contemplation; to make another contemplation is called wrong contemplation.”

From the criterion set up at the first contemplation, not one word has changed.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Lotus

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same lotus, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He divides this contemplation into nineteen sentences and makes each one concrete. The meaning of the three honored ones appearing comes from him — the teaching lord of the Sahā world settles his thought upon the west, and the compassionate honored one of Peace and Bliss casts his shadow over the eastern region; “the two honored ones consent and answer with no difference; it is only in being hidden or manifest that they differ.” The question and answer on why the Buddha stands and does not sit come from him, the answer being “he stands, snatches them up, and is off, having no time to sit properly to meet what is before him.” The whole form of the method comes from him too — first repenting with all one’s heart before an image of the Buddha and disclosing the offences one has committed, then requesting Śākyamuni and the Buddhas of the ten directions with mind and mouth, then being mindful of Amitābha’s original vow, and only then entering contemplation, sitting cross-legged facing west, slowly turning the mind, contemplating only a square inch and a single foot, with no limit set of days, months, or years. The distinction between seeing by way of the image and right reception is likewise his. For him the single contemplation of the Flower Throne is “the particular support,” belonging to Amitābha alone, plainly divided from the common support of the six contemplations before. He gathers the whole contemplation into four clauses: “Thus the flower rests upon the jeweled ground, rare treasures lie between its leaves, the dais gleams with its four banners, and the light performs the work of a Buddha.”

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He does not set this contemplation out on its own but marks the whole as “clarifying the Buddha’s body,” with four items beneath it: the charge to listen and the consent to teach, clarifying the appearance of the Buddha’s manifested body, the request for the future, and answering the request by clarifying the Buddha’s body at length; and the last of these opens into five gates of contemplation, of which the Flower Throne is the first door and the image, the Buddha’s body, Avalokiteśvara, and Mahāsthāmaprāpta are the four that follow. Within the gate of the Flower Throne he divides into five: clarifying the method by which the throne is accomplished together with distinguishing its appearance; clarifying its power to accord with capacities and benefit beings; concluding the contemplation; clarifying that it was accomplished by the power of the vow; and clarifying that the contemplation has benefit for the future. He sets up no fine articles of method and no question and answer on the appearing of the three honored ones; he threads it through with the outline alone, and his weight falls on two matters: that the throne was accomplished by a vow, and that the contemplation has benefit.

One line reads this Flower Throne as the place where the gate of practice is entered, and measures it down to posture, to season, and to whether a state of mind is genuine; the other reads it as the first of the five gates of the Buddha’s body, and measures it by what the outline gathers and to whom the benefit belongs.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: a wondrous flower such as this was accomplished by the power of the vow of the bhikṣu Dharmākara of old.

想像08 Contemplation of the Image

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

第七觀教人觀佛坐的那個座。座觀成了,經文說:「見此事已,次當想佛。」

到這裡,十六觀第一次把所觀之境放到佛身上。而佛開口先講的,不是佛長什麼樣子,是一段道理。善導《觀經四帖疏》把這一觀分作十三句,並在此下自設一道遮攔;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》把它總標為「明像想」,分作三科,於「作」「是」二字別立時位。兩家的讀法不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

佛先答了一個『為什麼』

經文說「次當想佛」,緊接著問了一句:「所以者何?」

為什麼要想佛?

這個『為什麼』是佛自己提的,也是佛自己答的。答語是四句,八個字最重:

「諸佛如來是法界身,遍入一切眾生心想中;是故汝等心想佛時,是心即是三十二相、八十隨形好。是心作佛,是心是佛。諸佛正遍知海,從心想生」

要理解這一段,得先看清一件事:這是在教觀法之前先講理由。理由講完,才說「想彼佛者,先當想像」。

也就是說,這八個字不是一段獨立的玄談,它是『為什麼你想得出來』的說明。

佛怎麼進得來

「法界身」三個字,歷來有兩種訓法。

一種是分開講:法界是所化的境,就是眾生界;身是能化的身,就是諸佛之身。心遍所以叫法界,身遍所以叫法界,無障礙所以叫法界——心到了,身也就隨著到;身隨於心,所以叫法界身。

另一種是合著講:法界身就是佛身,無所不遍,以法界為體。

兩種訓法在後面接的是同一句:「入一切眾生心想中。」

至於怎麼入?一路說:由眾生起念願見諸佛,佛就以無礙的智知道了,於是能在他所想的心中現出來。所以修行的人,不論在想念之中、還是在夢中定中見到佛,都算成就了這句話的義。另一路則說:眾生心淨,法身自在,所以說入眾生心想中——像白日升上天空,影子現在千百條河裡。

太陽並沒有分身。是水各自照見了它。

心緣一相,那一相就現

接著是最實際的一句:「是故汝等心想佛時,是心即是三十二相、八十隨形好。」

行門裡把這句話講得很細:從頭頂到腳底,心想不捨,一樣一樣地觀,沒有片刻停歇。因為心緣哪一相,哪一相就現;心若不緣,眾相就見不著。是自己的心想去作,才應著心現出來。

相不是等在那裡讓人看見的,是心緣到哪裡,哪裡才亮。

而八十隨形好不必另想——佛相既然現了,眾好自然都跟著。

「是心作佛,是心是佛」

然後是那八個字。

三家的讀法都在,都不繞。

一路說:是心作佛,是依著自己的信心去緣那個相、像那樣去作;是心是佛,是心能想佛,依所想的佛身而現,這就是心佛了——離開這個心之外,再沒有另一尊不同的佛。

一路把「作」與「是」分成兩個時位:佛本來是無,心淨了才有;因為這個三昧,心終究會成佛——這是「作」。而聽了『本來是無、心淨才有』,若以為心與佛判然是兩個,所以說「即是」——心外沒有佛,也沒有成佛之因;開始學的時候叫作,成就了就是佛

還有一路說得最短:是心作佛,是說心能作佛;是心是佛,是說心外無佛。像火從木頭裡出來,火離不開木頭;正因為離不開,才能燒木頭,木頭被火燒了,木頭就是火。

三家的話並不一樣,而三家都把重量放在同一個地方:你現在想的這個心,不是一個旁觀者。

一道自設的遮攔

也正是在這裡,一路特別加了一道遮攔。

有的修行人把這一門的義拿去作唯識法身之觀,或者作自性清淨佛性觀——那個讀法「其意甚錯,絕無少分相似」。

理由給得很清楚:經文明說是「想像假立三十二相」。真如法界身哪裡有相可緣、有身可取?法身無色,眼睛對不上,也沒有別的東西可以比方,所以只能拿虛空來喻它的體。而現在這個觀門,是指定一個方向、立起一個相,把心住在那裡去取境——通篇沒有講無相離念。

末後一句最重:如來早就知道末代罪濁的凡夫,連立相住心都還做不到,何況離相去求那件事——那就像一個沒有神通的人,要在空中蓋房子。

同一部疏裡,「離此心外,更無異佛者也」與「其意甚錯」相去不過五行。兩句都在,兩句都是他寫的。經文說了什麼,我們照著讀;他分了什麼界,也照著錄。這裡不作調停。

從頭頂到腳底,再從腳底回到頭頂

道理講完,才是觀法。

「閉目開目,見一寶像,如閻浮檀金色,坐彼華上。」——上一觀所作的那個座,這裡派上了用場:像要有坐處。

觀像的方法同前:從頭頂一樣一樣想下去,面、眉、毫相、眼、鼻、口、耳、咽、項、肩、臂、手指,再把心往上抽,胸、腹、臍、脛、膝、足、十指、千輪。從上往下叫順觀,從下面的千輪往上叫逆觀。這樣逆順地住心,不久必定成就。

而佛身、華座、寶地必須上下通觀,不可只取一段。

有一句判語在此下得很重:十三觀之中,寶地、寶華、金像這幾觀最為要緊;若要教人,就教這個法——這一法成了,別的觀自然就了了。

出了定,還聽得見

像觀成就之後,經文寫的不是境界更大,而是聲音來了。

修行的人會聽見水流、光明以及眾寶樹、鳧鴈、鴛鴦都在說微妙的法。而下一句才是關節:「出定、入定恒聞妙法。」

不只在定中。出了定,還在。

然後經文給了一把驗尺:出定的時候要憶持不捨,「令與修多羅合」——讓所聽見的,與經教相應。若不相合,名為妄想;若與它相合,名為粗略地見到了極樂世界。

這把尺立得極穩。它不問你聽見的美不美、奇不奇,只問一件事:和經上說的對不對得起來。對不上,就是妄想,哪怕聽了一整座定。

而對得上,也只給你「麁想見極樂世界」六個字——粗略地見到而已,還不是真見。經文不肯多給一分。

現在這個身上

全觀收在利益上:「作是觀者,除無量億劫生死之罪,於現身中得念佛三昧。」

「於現身中」四個字值得停一下。前一觀說的是「必定當生極樂世界」,講的是往後;這一觀說的是現在這個身上就得。

一個假立的形像,觀成了,得的是念佛三昧。

障重的人上不了真佛之觀,所以大聖垂哀,先教他把心注在一尊形像上。像是假的,三昧是真的。

承衍——三副眼讀同八個字

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以三副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一段話,換三種讀法來看。

曇鸞一路(北魏)是《往生論註》的讀法。他釋《往生論》「相好光一尋,色像超群生」時,把本段全文引作問端,然後自答:法界是眾生的心法,因為心能生世間出世間一切諸法,所以叫心為法界;法界能生諸如來的相好身,就像色等能生眼識,所以佛身叫法界身。他的譬有二:一是水清則色像現,水與像不一不異,所以說佛的相好身就是心想;二是火從木出,火離不開木。他釋這八字最短——「是心作佛者,言心能作佛也。是心是佛者,心外無佛也。」

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他分本觀為十三句,把佛何以總舉諸佛設為問答(答在三身同證、悲智果圓等齊無二),把法界身開為三義,把「是心即是三十二相」落實成從頂至足的次第住心;順觀、逆觀之名出於他,「此寶地寶華金像等觀最要」之判出於他,唯識法身觀與自性清淨佛性觀之簡也出於他。在他,本觀是「假正報」——假立真像以住心,同彼佛以證境,為的是第九觀的真身。他讀本觀的邪正判,不落在末後兩句,而落在「令與脩多羅合」上。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他分本觀為三科,最用力處在「作」與「是」的分位:始學名作,終成即是佛;望自己當來的果,由觀而生彼,叫心作佛;現在觀佛時心中所現的,就是諸佛法身之體,叫心是佛。他把「令與修多羅合」讀作教法相應,又出一解:入定是修多羅,出定之時心與定合。三號之訓也出於他——多陀阿伽度、阿羅呵、三藐三佛陀,就是如來、應供、正遍知。

一路把這八字讀成心與佛之不一不異,量到水與像;一路讀成假立之相與真身之階,量到住心之順逆;一路讀成因果之始終,量到作與是的分位。

而經自己只說了兩句:是心作佛,是心是佛。

The seventh contemplation taught the throne upon which the Buddha sits. Once the contemplation of the throne was accomplished, the sūtra says: “Once this matter has been seen, next you should form the image of the Buddha.”

Here, for the first time in the sixteen contemplations, the object contemplated is set upon the Buddha himself. And what he says first is not what a buddha looks like; it is a piece of doctrine. Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles divides this contemplation into thirteen sentences and sets up a barrier of his own beneath it; Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life marks the whole of it as the clarifying of the forming of the image, divides it into three topics, and assigns separate positions in time to the two words “makes” and “is.” The two houses read differently, and each keeps his reasons in his own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

The Buddha First Answered a “Why”

The sūtra says “next you should form the image of the Buddha,” and immediately asks: “Why so?”

Why must one form the image of the Buddha?

The “why” is raised by the Buddha himself, and answered by him. The answer runs to four sentences, of which eight characters weigh most:

“The buddhas, the tathāgatas, are the dharma-realm body, and they enter everywhere into the imaging mind of every sentient being; therefore, when your minds form the image of a buddha, this mind is at that very moment the thirty-two marks and the eighty secondary excellences conforming to the form. This mind makes the Buddha; this mind is the Buddha. The ocean of perfect and universal knowledge of the buddhas arises from the imaging mind.”

To understand this passage one thing must first be seen clearly: the reason is given before the method of contemplation is taught. Only when the reason has been given does the sūtra say, “one who would form the image of that Buddha should first form the image of his figure.”

That is to say, these eight characters are not a piece of independent metaphysics. They are the explanation of why you are able to form the image at all.

How the Buddha Gets In

The three characters of “dharma-realm body” have from of old been construed in two ways.

One takes them apart: the dharma-realm is the sphere that is converted, namely the realm of sentient beings; the body is the body that converts, namely the body of the buddhas. Because the mind pervades it is called the dharma-realm; because the body pervades it is called the dharma-realm; because there is no obstruction it is called the dharma-realm — the mind arrives, and the body arrives with it; the body follows upon the mind, and therefore it is called the dharma-realm body.

The other takes them together: the dharma-realm body is simply the Buddha’s body, which pervades everywhere and has the dharma-realm for its substance.

Both constructions join to the same next sentence: “enters into the imaging mind of every sentient being.”

And how does he enter? One line says: because sentient beings give rise to the thought and wish to see the buddhas, the Buddha knows it with unobstructed wisdom and so is able to appear within the mind that is imaging him. Therefore, whether a practitioner sees the Buddha in thought and image, or in a dream, or in concentration, the meaning of that sentence is fulfilled. The other line says: the minds of sentient beings being pure, the dharma-body is unhindered, and so it is said that he enters into the imaging mind of sentient beings — like the white sun rising in the sky, its reflection appearing in a hundred streams.

The sun has not divided itself. It is the waters that have each caught sight of it.

The Mind Takes One Mark as Object, and That Mark Appears

Then comes the most practical sentence of all: “Therefore, when your minds form the image of a buddha, this mind is at that very moment the thirty-two marks and the eighty secondary excellences conforming to the form.”

The gate of practice spells this out finely: from the crown of the head to the soles of the feet, the mind’s imaging does not let go, and one contemplates them one by one without a moment’s rest. For whichever mark the mind takes as its object, that mark appears; if the mind does not take them as object, the many marks cannot be seen. It is one’s own imaging mind that makes them, and only so do they appear in answer to the mind.

The marks are not waiting there to be seen; wherever the mind reaches, there the light comes on.

And the eighty secondary excellences need not be imaged separately — once the Buddha’s marks have appeared, all the excellences follow of themselves.

“This Mind Makes the Buddha; This Mind Is the Buddha”

Then those eight characters.

Three houses have read them, and not one of them takes a roundabout way.

One line says: this mind makes the Buddha — relying on one’s own mind of trust, one takes that mark as object and makes it accordingly; this mind is the Buddha — the mind is able to form the image of the Buddha, and he appears in dependence on the Buddha-body imaged; this is the mind-Buddha, and apart from this mind there is no other, different buddha.

One line divides “makes” and “is” into two positions in time: the Buddha was originally not there, and is there because the mind has become pure; and by reason of this samādhi the mind will in the end come to be a buddha — that is “makes.” But if, having heard that he was originally not there and is there because the mind is pure, one supposes mind and Buddha to be flatly two, therefore it says “is precisely” — outside the mind there is no buddha and no cause of a buddha; at the beginning of training it is called making, and when it is finally accomplished it is the Buddha.

And one line says it most briefly of all: this mind makes the Buddha says that the mind is able to make a buddha; this mind is the Buddha says that outside the mind there is no buddha. It is like fire coming out of wood: the fire cannot be apart from the wood; and just because it cannot be apart from it, it can burn the wood, and when the wood is burnt by the fire, the wood is fire.

The three houses do not say the same thing, and yet all three put the weight in the same place: the mind with which you are now imaging is not a bystander.

A Barrier He Set Up Himself

And it is just here that one line adds a barrier.

Some practitioners take the meaning of this one gate and make of it a contemplation of the consciousness-only dharma-body, or a contemplation of the intrinsically pure buddha-nature — of that reading it is said that “their intent is greatly mistaken, and there is not the least part of resemblance.”

The reason is given plainly: the sūtra says in so many words that in forming the image one provisionally sets up the thirty-two marks. How should the dharma-realm body of suchness have marks that can be taken as object, or a body that can be grasped? The dharma-body has no form, the eye cannot face it, there is nothing else of its kind to set beside it, and so empty space is all one can take to figure its substance. Whereas this gate of contemplation points out a direction, sets up a mark, and settles the mind there to take the object — nowhere in it is marklessness or the departure from thought taught.

The last sentence weighs most: the Tathāgata knew from afar that ordinary beings of the last age, guilty and turbid, cannot so much as set up the mark and settle the mind, much less depart from the mark and seek that matter — which would be like a man with no supernormal power trying to build a house in mid-air.

Within one and the same commentary, “apart from this mind there is no other, different buddha” and “their intent is greatly mistaken” stand not five lines apart. Both are there, and both are his. What the sūtra says, we read as it stands; what boundary he drew, we record as it stands. No reconciliation is imposed here.

From the Crown to the Soles, and from the Soles Back to the Crown

Only when the doctrine has been given does the method of contemplation come.

“Whether the eyes are closed or open, one sees a jeweled image of the colour of Jambūnada gold, seated upon that flower.” — the throne made in the contemplation before is now put to use: an image must have somewhere to sit.

The method of contemplating the image is as before: from the crown one images them one by one — the face, the brows, the tuft-mark, the eyes, the nose, the mouth, the ears, the throat, the neck, the shoulders, the arms, the fingers — and then draws the mind back upward: the chest, the belly, the navel, the shins, the knees, the feet, the ten toes, the thousand-spoked wheels. From above downward is called forward contemplation; from the thousand-spoked wheels below upward is called reverse contemplation. Settling the mind thus, in reverse and forward order, one will surely succeed before long.

And the Buddha’s body, the Flower Throne, and the jeweled ground must be contemplated throughout, above and below; no single stretch of it may be taken by itself.

One judgment is set down here with great weight: among the thirteen contemplations, those of the jeweled ground, the jeweled flower, and the golden image are the most essential; if one would teach another, let him teach this method — once this one method is accomplished, the other contemplations are of themselves clear.

Out of Concentration, and Still Hearing

After the contemplation of the image is accomplished, what the sūtra writes of is not that the object grows larger, but that a sound arrives.

The practitioner will hear the flowing water and the light, and the trees of many jewels, the wild ducks and geese and the mandarin ducks, all speaking the wondrous Dharma. And the sentence after it is the joint: “Whether he has come out of concentration or entered it, he constantly hears the wondrous Dharma.”

Not in concentration only. Out of it, it is still there.

Then the sūtra hands over a measuring rod: on coming out of concentration one must hold what was heard in memory and not let it go, and “let it be made to accord with Xiuduoluo” — let what has been heard correspond with the sūtras, the scriptural teaching. If it does not accord, it is called false imagining; if it does accord, it is called seeing the world of Ultimate Bliss in a rough image.

This rod is set very steadily. It does not ask whether what you heard was beautiful or strange; it asks one thing only: does it square with what stands in the scriptures? If it does not, it is false imagining, though a whole sitting of concentration was spent on it.

And if it does square, all one is granted is six characters: seeing the world of Ultimate Bliss in a rough image — seen roughly, no more; not yet truly seen. The sūtra will not grant a fraction more.

In This Present Body

The whole contemplation closes on its benefit: “To make this contemplation removes the offences of measureless koṭis of kalpas of birth-and-death, and in this present body one attains the samādhi of recollecting the Buddha.”

The four characters “in this present body” are worth a pause. The contemplation before said that one “will necessarily be born in the world of Ultimate Bliss,” which speaks of what comes after; this one speaks of what is gained in this very body.

A provisionally established figure, once the contemplation of it is accomplished, yields the samādhi of recollecting the Buddha.

Those whose obstructions are heavy cannot climb to the contemplation of the true Buddha, and so the great sage let down his compassion and first taught them to pour the mind upon a figure. The image is provisional; the samādhi is real.

Carrying Forward — Three Eyes Reading the Same Eight Characters

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, three eyes cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same eight characters, seen through three ways of reading.

The Tanluan line (Northern Wei) is the reading of the Commentary on the Treatise on Birth in the Pure Land. Glossing the line of the treatise on the marks and excellences whose light is one fathom and whose form-image surpasses that of the multitude of beings, he cites the whole of this passage as the question, and then answers it himself: the dharma-realm is the mind-dharma of sentient beings, and because the mind is able to give rise to all dharmas, worldly and world-transcending, the mind is named the dharma-realm; the dharma-realm is able to give rise to the body of the tathāgatas’ marks and excellences, just as form and the rest are able to give rise to eye-consciousness, and therefore the Buddha’s body is called the dharma-realm body. His similes are two: the first, that when the water is clear the form-image appears, and water and image are neither one nor different, so that the body of the Buddha’s marks and excellences is itself the mind’s imaging; the second, that fire comes out of wood, and the fire cannot be apart from the wood. His gloss on these eight characters is the shortest — “‘this mind makes the Buddha’ says that the mind is able to make a buddha; ‘this mind is the Buddha’ says that outside the mind there is no buddha.”

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He divides this contemplation into thirteen sentences; he sets up as question and answer why the Buddha raises the buddhas in general (the answer being that they alike realize the three bodies, and that in compassion and in wisdom their fruit is round, level and equal, without a second); he opens the dharma-realm body into three meanings; and he brings “this mind is itself the thirty-two marks” down to a settled sequence of the mind from crown to feet. The names of forward and reverse contemplation come from him, and so does the judgment that among the thirteen contemplations those of the jeweled ground, the jeweled flower, the golden image and the rest are the most essential, and so does the exclusion of the contemplation of the consciousness-only dharma-body and of the intrinsically pure buddha-nature. For him this contemplation is the provisional direct recompense — a true image provisionally set up for the mind to settle upon, made like to that Buddha so that the object may be realized, and all for the sake of the true body in the ninth contemplation. The judgment of wrong and right in this contemplation he attaches not to the last two sentences but to “let it be made to accord with Xiuduoluo.”

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He divides this contemplation into three topics, and puts out his greatest strength on the positions of “makes” and “is”: at the beginning of training it is called making, and when it is finally accomplished it is the Buddha; with a view to one’s own future fruit, that by contemplation one is born there is called the mind’s making the Buddha; and what appears in the mind while one is now contemplating the Buddha is the very substance of the dharma-body of the buddhas, which is called the mind’s being the Buddha. He reads “let it be made to accord with Xiuduoluo” as correspondence with the scriptural teaching, and gives a further gloss besides: entering concentration is Xiuduoluo, and on coming out of concentration the mind accords with the concentration. The gloss on the three titles is also his — Duotuoajiadu, Aluohe, Sanmiaosanfotuo, which are the Tathāgata, the Worthy of Offerings, and the Perfectly and Universally Knowing One.

One line reads these eight characters as the not-one-and-not-different of mind and Buddha, and measures it by water and image; one reads them as a provisional mark that is a stair to the true body, and measures it by the forward and reverse order of settling the mind; one reads them as the beginning and end of cause and fruit, and measures it by the positions of making and being.

And the sūtra itself has said only two sentences: this mind makes the Buddha; this mind is the Buddha.

遍觀一切色想09 Contemplation of All Forms Everywhere

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

第八觀所看的,是一尊像——閉目開目,見一寶像,坐在花座上。那是假立的。

第九觀,經文說:「此想成已,次當更觀無量壽佛身相光明。」

從像走到身。善導《觀經四帖疏》把這一觀叫作「真身觀」,並在此觀之下出了念佛三緣之義;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》把它叫作「觀佛真法身」,並在此觀之下用《釋論》的三種慈釋佛心。兩家所立不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

一個大到讀不下去的數

經文一開口就是量:

佛身高六十萬億那由他恒河沙由旬。眉間白毫右旋宛轉,像五座須彌山。佛眼清淨如四大海水,清白分明。身上每一個毛孔演出的光明,像一座須彌山。那一位佛的圓光,像百億個三千大千世界。

這些數目大到讀者的心根本接不住。

古來有一路讀法在此停下來,認真算了一筆帳:世人身長七尺,眼長一寸多;四大海水一海八萬四千由旬,四海合起來三十三萬六千由旬——照眼與身的比例推,身量頂多是眼的萬倍,怎麼會長到六十萬億那由他恒河沙由旬?於是他斷定:「恒河沙」三個字是譯人的失誤。

另一路讀法在這裡一個字也沒有說,只標了四個字:身量大小。

兩種讀法都在,都是他們自己書裡的話。經文寫的是六十萬億那由他恒河沙由旬——它就寫在那裡。

光為什麼只攝念佛的人

數目一路往上疊:八萬四千相,一一相中八萬四千好,一一好中八萬四千光明。

然後經文說了一句短的:「一一光明遍照十方世界,念佛眾生攝取不捨。」

光是遍照的,攝取的卻是念佛的眾生。

歷來的讀法在這裡設了一問,問得很直:備修眾行的人,只要迴向也都能往生,為什麼佛光普照,卻單單攝取念佛的人?

答是三重緣。

一是親緣。眾生口裡常稱佛,佛就聽見;身常禮敬佛,佛就看見;心常念佛,佛就知道。眾生憶念佛,佛也憶念眾生——身口意三業彼此不相捨離,所以叫親。

二是近緣。眾生願意見佛,佛就應著這個念現在眼前,所以叫近。

三是增上緣。眾生稱念,就除掉多劫的罪;命要終的時候,佛與聖眾自己來迎接,種種邪業所繫的都攔不住,所以叫增上。

三個名字都很樸素:親、近、增上。說的是同一件事的三個面——不是佛偏心,是那三業真的搭上了。

口不稱、身不禮、心不念,光還是遍照的;只是沒有那一頭去接。

「以觀佛身故亦見佛心」

全段最重的一句在中間:「作是觀者,名觀一切佛身,以觀佛身故亦見佛心。」

觀的是身,見到的卻是心。

這件事怎麼可能?

一路解得很短:由見佛身,所以就見佛心——身是由心起的,所以見身就是見心;而且因為見了身,心想轉為明利,所以才得見佛心。

另一路把它放在觀成的五個層次裡:因觀而得見十方諸佛;因見諸佛而結成念佛三昧;但觀一佛就是觀一切佛身;由見佛身就見佛心;而佛心以慈悲為體,以此平等大慈普攝一切。

兩路都沒有把「見心」講成一件神祕的事。身是心作出來的,所以身現到哪裡,心就在哪裡。

佛的心是什麼

而經文自己接著就給了答案,不留懸念:「諸佛心者大慈悲是,以無緣慈攝諸眾生。」

佛心不是別的,就是大慈悲。

「無緣慈」三個字,一路引論分作三種慈:

一種是眾生緣——不起心去攀緣一切眾生,而在眾生分上自然現出利益。像經上說的:我實在沒有去,是慈善根的力量能讓眾生見到這樣的事。

一種是法緣——不起心去觀法,而於一切法自然普照,像太陽照東西,沒有分別。

第三種是無緣——不起心去觀理,而在平等第一義中自然安住,以這樣的慈攝受一切眾生。

三種慈是一級比一級不動。到第三種,連『我在慈』這個念都不立了,而利益照樣現。

還有一個譬也是從論裡來的:像魚產的子,母魚若不憶念,子就爛壞了;眾生也是這樣,佛若不憶念,善根就壞了。

前面說「攝取不捨」,是三業相接;這裡說不憶念則善根壞,是不接就沒有。同一件事的兩面,經與論各說了一面。

我們讀這一句,容易把重量放在「慈」字上;而經文把重量放在「無緣」二字上——不起心而益自現,才是它要說的難處。

見到了以後呢

觀成之後,經文給了兩層果。

第一層在當下:「見此事者,即見十方一切諸佛」——見到這一位,就見到十方一切諸佛;因為見到諸佛的緣故,這叫念佛三昧。歷來的讀法把這一節分成五層,其中一層是:但觀一佛,就是觀一切佛身。

第二層在後世:「作此觀者,捨身他世,生諸佛前,得無生忍。」

「捨身他世」四個字說得很平常——捨掉這個身,到來世去。而所許的不是一個地方,是一個處境:生在諸佛面前。

一路把這件事說得很家常:因為修念佛三昧的緣故而得見佛,於是發願生生常常值遇——像一個人學手藝,從小做到大,做出來的自然就精妙了。

我們大概也懂這個道理。一件事做久了,它就不再是一件要下決心的事。

而全觀最後一句,把果又推遠一層:「得見無量諸佛故,諸佛現前受記。」見到了,還要被認出來——諸佛就在面前為他授記。歷來的讀法說得更具體:既見諸佛,就在定中得蒙授記。

從一根白毫進去

講到這裡,經文忽然把整片莊嚴收起來。

前面說「其光相好及與化佛,不可具說」——說不完。接著卻是:「但當憶想令心明見。」

再接著是最實際的一句:「觀無量壽佛者,從一相好入,但觀眉間白毫,極令明了。」

八萬四千相,只取一相;只取眉間那一根白毫,把它看清楚。

為什麼?因為相好太多,不能總雜地觀;只要見到白毫這一相,一切眾相自然就現。

這是全經最實用的一句。前面所有的億萬重數目,最後只交給你一個入口,而那個入口小到只有眉心一點。

而經文許的果也接得極快:見到眉間白毫相,八萬四千相好自然當見;見到無量壽佛,就見到十方無量諸佛;得見無量諸佛,諸佛就在面前為他授記。

一根白毫,通到十方。

承衍——兩副眼看同一根白毫

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一根白毫,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他稱本觀為「真身觀」,分十二句。他把本觀放在依正真假的架子上:第八像觀是「假正報」,本觀是「真正報」——由前面的假正,漸漸息了亂想、心眼得開,粗見彼方清淨二報,除了昏惑,才得見真實的境相。念佛三緣之義出於他,親、近、增上三名出於他;而他所引以為證的三部經,都是這一軸的經:大本四十八願中唯明專念名號得生,《彌陀經》中一日七日專念名號得生,此經定散之文中唯標專念名號得生。他於身量之數不置一疑。全觀他以兩句收之:「斯乃真形量遠毫若五山,震響隨機光沾有識,欲使含靈歸命注想無遺,乘佛本弘齊臨彼國。」

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他稱本觀為「觀佛真法身」,分五科,其中別立一科「正明觀於佛心」。他於身量處用世人眼身之比推算,斷「恒河沙」三字為譯人之謬;於佛心處引《釋論》三種慈——眾生緣、法緣、無緣——與魚子之譬;於往生處引《般舟經》;於白毫之量處引《觀佛三昧經》與《寶性論》,並說可先取釋迦毫相的大小現觀,等三昧觀心成就了,才好稱彼佛的相而觀。

一路把這一身讀成本願所成之真報,量到三業如何與佛相接;一路把它讀成法身之現,量到數目、慈之品類與觀法的次第。

而經自己只說了一句:以觀佛身故亦見佛心。

What the eighth contemplation looked at was an image — whether the eyes were closed or open, a jeweled image, seated upon the Flower Throne. That was provisionally set up.

At the ninth, the sūtra says: “Once this image is accomplished, next you should further contemplate the bodily form and the light of the Buddha of Measureless Life.”

From the image to the body. Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles calls this contemplation “the contemplation of the true body,” and brings out beneath it the meaning of the three conditions of recollecting the Buddha; Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life calls it “the contemplation of the Buddha’s true dharma-body,” and beneath it glosses the Buddha’s mind by the three kinds of kindness of the Explanatory Treatise. The two houses set up different things, and each keeps his reasons in his own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

A Number Too Large to Read Through

The sūtra opens with measure:

The Buddha’s body is as many yojanas in height as six hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of the sands of the Gaṅgā. The white tuft between his brows curls to the right, winding smoothly, like five Mount Sumerus. His eyes are pure as the water of the four great seas, clear white and distinct. The light that every pore of his body sends forth is like a Mount Sumeru. That Buddha’s circular radiance is like a hundred koṭis of the three-thousandfold great-thousand world-system.

These numbers are too large for a reader’s mind to catch.

One line of reading stops here from of old and works the sum out in earnest: a man of the world is seven feet tall and his eye something over an inch; one of the four great seas is eighty-four thousand yojanas, and the four together three hundred and thirty-six thousand yojanas — reckoning by the proportion of eye to body, the body could be at most ten thousand times the eye. How then should it run to six hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of the sands of the Gaṅgā of yojanas? And so he judges: the three characters of “the sands of the Gaṅgā” are an error of the translator.

The other line of reading says not a word here, and marks four characters only: the measure of the body.

Both readings stand, and both are the words of their own books. What the sūtra writes is six hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of the sands of the Gaṅgā of yojanas — and there it stands written.

Why Does the Light Gather In Only Those Who Recollect the Buddha?

The numbers pile upward: eighty-four thousand marks; within each mark, eighty-four thousand excellences; within each excellence, eighty-four thousand rays of light.

And then the sūtra says something short: “Each single ray shines everywhere upon the worlds of the ten directions, gathering in the sentient beings who recollect the Buddha and not forsaking them.”

The light shines everywhere; what it gathers in is those who recollect the Buddha.

The readings handed down set a question here, and set it bluntly: those who fully cultivate the many practices, if only they dedicate and direct the merit, all attain birth in that land — why then does the Buddha’s light, which shines everywhere, gather in those who recollect the Buddha alone?

The answer is three layers of condition.

First, the intimate condition. The mouths of sentient beings constantly utter the Buddha’s name, and the Buddha hears; their bodies constantly pay homage to the Buddha, and the Buddha sees; their minds constantly recollect the Buddha, and the Buddha knows. Sentient beings hold the Buddha in mind, and the Buddha holds sentient beings in mind — the three acts of body, speech, and mind on either side do not part from each other, and so it is called intimate.

Second, the proximate condition. Sentient beings wish to see the Buddha, and the Buddha, answering that thought, is present before their eyes; and so it is called proximate.

Third, the dominant condition. Sentient beings utter and recollect, and the offences of many kalpas are removed; when life is about to end, the Buddha with the host of sages comes of himself to welcome them, and no bond of wrong karma can bar the way; and so it is called dominant.

All three names are plain ones: intimate, proximate, dominant. They state three faces of one and the same thing — it is not that the Buddha plays favourites; it is that those three acts have really made contact.

Where the mouth does not utter, the body does not pay homage, and the mind does not recollect, the light shines everywhere all the same; only there is no hand at the other end to take it.

“Because He Contemplates the Buddha’s Body He Also Sees the Buddha’s Mind”

The weightiest sentence of the passage stands in the middle: “To make this contemplation is called contemplating the body of every buddha; and because one contemplates the Buddha’s body one also sees the Buddha’s mind.”

What is contemplated is a body; what is seen is a mind.

How can that be?

One line explains it very briefly: because he sees the Buddha’s body he sees the Buddha’s mind — the body arises from the mind, so that to see the body is to see the mind; and because the body has been seen, the mind’s imaging turns clearer, and only then does he come to see the Buddha’s mind.

The other sets it inside the five stages of the contemplation’s accomplishment: by contemplating he comes to see the buddhas of the ten directions; because he sees the buddhas the samādhi of recollecting the Buddha is brought to completion; to contemplate one buddha alone is to contemplate the body of every buddha; by seeing the Buddha’s body he sees the Buddha’s mind; and the Buddha’s mind has kindness and compassion for its substance, embracing all things everywhere with this level and equal great kindness.

Neither line makes “seeing the mind” into anything mysterious. The body is what the mind has made; therefore wherever the body appears, there the mind is.

What the Buddha’s Mind Is

And the sūtra itself supplies the answer next, leaving nothing in suspense: “The mind of the buddhas is great kindness and compassion; with a kindness that is without object he embraces all sentient beings.”

The Buddha’s mind is nothing else: it is great kindness and compassion.

As for the kindness that is without object, one line cites a treatise dividing kindness into three:

One has sentient beings as its object — without raising the mind to lay hold of any sentient being, benefit appears of itself upon sentient beings. As the scripture says: I in truth do not go; it is the power of the wholesome root of kindness that lets sentient beings see such things.

One has dharmas as its object — without raising the mind to contemplate dharmas, it shines of itself upon all dharmas, as the sun shines upon things and makes no distinctions.

The third is without object — the mind is not raised to contemplate the principle, and yet it abides of itself in the level and equal first meaning, and with such kindness it embraces all sentient beings.

The three kinds of kindness are, each above the last, less moved. By the third, even the thought I am being kind is not set up, and the benefit appears all the same.

There is a simile too, and it comes from the same treatise: like the spawn a fish lays — if the mother does not hold them in mind, the young rot away; so it is with sentient beings, and if the Buddha does not hold them in mind, their wholesome roots decay.

Earlier it was said that he gathers them in and does not forsake them, which is the meeting of the three acts; here it is said that where he does not hold them in mind the wholesome roots decay, which is that where there is no meeting there is nothing. Two faces of one thing, of which sūtra and treatise have each stated one.

Reading this sentence, we easily put the weight on the word kindness; the sūtra puts it on the words without object — that benefit should appear where no mind is raised at all is the hard thing it means to say.

And After It Has Been Seen?

After the contemplation is accomplished, the sūtra gives two layers of fruit.

The first is here and now: “One who sees this matter sees at that very moment all the buddhas of the ten directions” — see this one, and one sees all the buddhas of the ten directions; and because the buddhas are seen, this is called the samādhi of recollecting the Buddha. The readings handed down divide this stretch into five layers, one of which is: to contemplate one buddha alone is to contemplate the body of every buddha.

The second lies in the life to come: “To make this contemplation is, when this body has been cast off and the world to come is reached, to be born before the buddhas and to attain the patience of non-arising.”

The four characters “casting off the body, in the world to come” are said very plainly — cast off this body, go on to the life to come. And what is promised is not a place but a standing: to be born in the presence of the buddhas.

One line puts the matter in quite household terms: because he cultivates the samādhi of recollecting the Buddha the seeing of the Buddha is aroused, and he vows to meet him constantly, birth after birth — like a man who practises a craft, and who, working at it from youth to full age, comes to make fine things of himself.

We probably understand this too. Do a thing long enough and it stops being a thing you have to resolve upon.

And the last sentence of the whole contemplation pushes the fruit one stage further: “Because he attains the sight of the measureless buddhas, the buddhas, present before him, give him the prediction.” Having seen, he is also recognized — the buddhas are there before him and give him the prediction. The readings handed down put it more precisely still: once the buddhas are seen, the prediction is received within concentration.

Entering by a Single White Tuft

At this point the sūtra suddenly folds up the whole spread of adornment.

Before, it said “those rays, those marks and excellences, and the manifested Buddhas cannot be told in full” — there is no ending them. And what follows is: “One should only hold the image in mind, so that the mind sees it clear and distinct.”

And after that comes the most practical sentence of all: “One who contemplates the Buddha of Measureless Life enters by a single mark or excellence: he contemplates the white tuft between the brows alone, and makes it utterly clear.”

Of eighty-four thousand marks, one is taken; and of that one, the single white tuft between the brows — look at that until it is clear.

Why? Because the marks and excellences are too many to be contemplated all mixed together; and once the one mark of the white tuft is seen, all the many marks appear of themselves.

This is the most usable sentence in the sūtra. All those koṭis upon koṭis of tiers of number are handed over at last as one entrance, and that entrance is no bigger than a point between the brows.

And the fruit the sūtra promises follows just as fast: see the mark of the white tuft between the brows, and the eighty-four thousand marks and excellences will of themselves come to be seen; see the Buddha of Measureless Life, and one sees the measureless buddhas of the ten directions; attain the sight of the measureless buddhas, and the buddhas give the prediction there before one.

A single white tuft, and it opens on the ten directions.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same White Tuft

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same white tuft, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He calls this contemplation “the contemplation of the true body” and divides it into twelve sentences. He sets it in the frame of the true and the provisional within the dependent and the direct recompense: the eighth, of the image, is “the provisional direct recompense,” and this one is “the true direct recompense” — by that provisional direct recompense scattered images are gradually stilled and the eye of the mind opens; the twofold pure recompense of that quarter is roughly seen, dullness and delusion are removed, and only then are the real objects seen. The meaning of the three conditions of recollecting the Buddha comes from him, and the three names, intimate, proximate, dominant, come from him; and the three sūtras he cites as warrant are all of this one axis — that in the forty-eight vows of the larger sūtra it is clarified only that by singly recollecting the Name one attains birth, that in The Amitābha Sūtra one attains birth by singly recollecting the Name for one day or seven, and that in the texts of concentration and of a scattered mind in this sūtra it is marked only that by singly recollecting the Name one attains birth. Upon the number of the body’s measure he sets down no doubt at all. The whole contemplation he closes in two sentences: “Such is the true form: its measure far-reaching, its tuft like five mountains; its resounding answers to the capacity, and its light touches all that has consciousness; it is to make all that bears spirit entrust its life and pour out its imaging without remainder, and, riding the Buddha’s original vastness, come alike to that land.”

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He calls this contemplation “the contemplation of the Buddha’s true dharma-body” and divides it into five topics, setting up among them a topic of his own, “directly clarifying the contemplating of the Buddha’s mind.” At the measure of the body he reckons by the proportion of a man’s eyes to his body and judges the three characters of “the sands of the Gaṅgā” to be an error of the translator; at the Buddha’s mind he cites the three kinds of kindness of the Explanatory Treatise — with sentient beings as object, with dharmas as object, and without object — together with the simile of the fish’s spawn; at birth in that land he cites the Pratyutpanna Sūtra; and at the measure of the white tuft he cites the Sūtra on the Samādhi of Contemplating the Buddha and the Treatise on the Jewel-Nature, saying that one may first take the size of Śākyamuni’s tuft-mark and contemplate it as present, and that only when the samādhi and the contemplating mind are accomplished is it well to contemplate in a measure answering to that Buddha’s marks.

One line reads this body as the true recompense brought about by the original vow, and measures it by how the three acts make contact with the Buddha; the other reads it as the appearing of the dharma-body, and measures it by numbers, by the kinds of kindness, and by the order of the method of contemplation.

And the sūtra itself has said only one sentence: because he contemplates the Buddha’s body he also sees the Buddha’s mind.

觀觀世音菩薩真實色身相10 Contemplation of the True Form-Body of the Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

第九觀看的是佛的真身。這一觀,看的是站在祂左邊的那一位。

經文說:「見無量壽佛了了分明已,次亦應觀觀世音菩薩。」

善導《觀經四帖疏》把這一觀分作十五句,幾乎逐相有科;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》只分三科,全觀的釋文不過六行。兩家詳略之懸殊,以本觀為最。各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

從頂到足,一路排下來

這一段的寫法和前面都不同。

前幾觀是層層放大——一片葉子、一道光、一個相,數目往上翻。這一觀是從頭頂一路排到腳底

頭頂的肉髻,項後的圓光,頂上的天冠,面,眉間的毫相,臂,手掌,十根指頭的指端,抬起的腳,落下的腳。

十個部位,一個一個過去。第八觀教過的「順觀」——從上向下——在這裡有了一個現成的樣本。

一個八十億那由他恒河沙由旬的身

先看數。

「此菩薩身長八十億那由他恒河沙由旬,身紫金色」。

上一觀的佛身是六十萬億那由他恒河沙由旬。這一位是八十億——數目的單位換了,前一個帶「萬億」,這一個只有「億」。經文沒有解釋這個差別,只是照著寫。

而身色也不同:佛身是「百千萬億夜摩天閻浮檀金色」,這一位是「紫金色」。到面上,經文又轉了一次:「觀世音菩薩面如閻浮檀金色」——身是紫金,面是閻浮檀金,一身之內兩種顏色。歷來的讀法在這裡特地立了一科,就叫「面色與身色不同」。

一部經寫到這樣的地步,連一位菩薩臉的顏色和身的顏色不一樣,都要單獨標出來。

他的光裡,有你

總標身相的一段裡,有一句很特別:

「舉身光中五道眾生,一切色相皆於中現。」

他全身的光明之中,五道的眾生、一切的色相,都在那光裡顯現。

前面幾觀的光是往外照的——遍照十方、遍其寶土。這一句的光是往裡收的:眾生現在他的光裡。

經文沒有解釋這件事,只是這樣寫著。

頭上那一尊站著的佛

接著是天冠:「其天冠中有一立化佛,高二十五由旬。」

一位菩薩,頭頂上頂著一尊佛,而且那尊佛是站著的。

有一路讀法在此下了五個字:帶果而行因。

果已經在頭上了,因還在腳下走著。

一雙手

然後是手。

手掌現出五百億種雜蓮華的顏色;十根指頭,每一根的指端有八萬四千道紋,像印上的文;每一道紋有八萬四千種顏色;每一種顏色有八萬四千道光。

數目又翻上去了。可是這一次翻完,落點極其具體:

「其光柔軟普照一切,以此寶手接引眾生。」

億萬重的莊嚴,最後是一隻伸出來的手。

而那光的性質,經文只給了兩個字:柔軟。

抬腳與落腳

腳的寫法也是兩個動作。

抬起腳的時候,腳底的千輻輪相自然化成五百億座光明臺;落下腳的時候,有金剛摩尼花散布得處處都滿。

抬起是臺,落下是花。一位菩薩走路,走過的地方就這樣。

歷來的讀法給這一節的科名是「足有德用之相」——德不在別處,就在那雙腳落下去的地方。經文寫手的時候說「接引」,寫足的時候不說用途,只寫抬起與落下所現的相;用不用得上,它一個字也沒有添。

「如佛無異」,然後「不及世尊」

全段最重的一判在這裡:

「其餘身相,眾好具足,如佛無異,唯頂上肉髻及無見頂相,不及世尊。」

其餘的身相,種種好都具足,和佛沒有差別。

只有兩樣不及:頂上的肉髻,和無見頂相。

這是全經唯一一處,明說所觀之身有兩處比不上佛。

歷來的讀法把這兩個字說得很清楚:這是師徒位別、果願未圓,所以這兩相有虧——用一個「不足」的地方,標出他還在因地上。

經文寫得極省。它不說『所以你要努力』,也不說『他其實已經成佛只是示現』。它就寫了「不及世尊」四個字,然後往下走。

而我們讀到這裡,其實已經被告知了一件事:在這部經裡,位次是照實記的。 相好可以八萬四千地數上去,該不及的那兩樣,一樣也不會多給。

只是聽見名字

觀儀之後,佛又叫了一次阿難,補了一段利益:

「作是觀者不遇諸禍,淨除業障,除無數劫生死之罪。」

接著是一句更輕的:「如此菩薩,但聞其名,獲無量福,何況諦觀!」

只是聽見他的名字,就得無量福;何況仔細地觀。

這一句的語氣是『舉輕以顯重』——先說那個最容易的,再說這個難的。而它順帶交代了一件事:這一觀所被的機,低到只要耳朵聽見過。

不遇諸禍

利益還有更前面的一句:「作是觀者不遇諸禍,淨除業障,除無數劫生死之罪。」

三件事:不遇諸禍、淨除業障、除無數劫生死之罪。

第一件是現世的,第二件是心地的,第三件是曠劫的。三件由近而遠排下來,而排在最前面的那一件最樸素——不遇到災禍。

經文沒有把它說成一個保證;而這三件利益所繫的人,句子開頭那四個字就寫著了——作這一觀的人。它只是這樣列著,然後接下去講觀儀。

三件之中,最先說的那一件也最貼近日用;經文把它放在最前面,而不放在最後作結。

從哪裡下手

末後是觀儀,也是這一觀最實用的兩句:

「若有欲觀觀世音菩薩者,當先觀頂上肉髻,次觀天冠。其餘眾相亦次第觀之」。

先觀肉髻,次觀天冠。

而剛才那個「不及世尊」的地方,正是肉髻。經文教人下手的第一處,恰恰是他不足的那一處。經文沒有點破這個對照,它只是照著次第說下去。

驗收的標準仍是那句老話:「悉令明了,如觀掌中。」

承衍——兩副眼看同一雙手

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一雙手,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他分本觀為十五句,總標身相之下再分六事:身量大小、身色與佛不同、肉髻與佛蠃髻不同、圓光大小、化佛侍者多少、身光普現五道眾生;手之一句再分六事,末歸於「以此寶光之手接引有緣也」。二相不及之義出於他——「師徒位別、果願未圓,致使二相有虧,表居不足之地也」。他讀觀音,是「通正報」;而第八像觀中所想的觀音像是假,此觀之真實色身相是真。全觀他以兩句收之:「斯乃觀音願重影現十方,寶手停輝隨機引接。」

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他分本觀為三科:結上、正明觀菩薩身、觀之邪正;觀身相之下再分三:觀身相、明與佛同異、還舉利勸修。他於此觀所出之義唯一句——冠中的立化佛是「帶果而行因」;所出之訓亦唯一條——釋迦毘楞伽,翻作「能聖」。他所牒的首句作「復應觀觀世音菩薩」,與底本「次亦應觀」不同,所據之本於此一字有異。

一路把這一身讀成願重而手停輝的接引者,量到相相之同異與位次之不足;一路把它讀成帶果行因的菩薩法身,六行而止。

而經自己只說了一句:以此寶手接引眾生。

The ninth contemplation looked at the true body of the Buddha. This one looks at the figure who stands at his left.

The sūtra says: “When the Buddha of Measureless Life has been seen clear and distinct, next you should also contemplate the Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara.”

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles divides this contemplation into fifteen sentences, with an outline item for very nearly every mark; Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life divides it into three items only, and his exposition of the whole contemplation runs to no more than six lines. Nowhere are the two houses further apart in fullness and brevity than here. Each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

From the Crown to the Sole, Laid Out in a Single Descent

The manner of writing in this passage is unlike that of any before it.

The contemplations just past enlarged layer upon layer — one leaf, one ray, one mark, the numbers turning ever upward. This one runs from the crown of the head straight down to the sole of the foot:

the fleshy protuberance on the crown, the circular radiance behind the neck, the heavenly crown above, the face, the tuft between the brows, the arms, the palms, the tips of the ten fingers, the foot lifted, the foot set down.

Ten places, gone through one after another. The “contemplating in sequence” — from above downward — that the eighth contemplation taught has here a ready specimen.

A Body of Eighty Koṭis of Nayutas of the Sands of the Gaṅgā of Yojanas

Look first at the numbers.

“This bodhisattva’s body is eighty koṭis of nayutas of yojanas in height, as many as the sands of the Gaṅgā; his body is purple-gold in colour.”

The Buddha’s body in the contemplation before was six hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of yojanas, as many as the sands of the Gaṅgā. This figure is eighty koṭis — the unit of the number has changed: the former carried “myriads of koṭis,” this one has only “koṭis.” The sūtra offers no explanation of the difference; it simply writes it down.

The colour of the body differs too. The Buddha’s body was “the colour of a hundred thousand myriads of koṭis of Jambūnada gold of the Yāma heaven”; this figure is “purple-gold in colour.” And when it comes to the face the sūtra turns once again: “the face of the Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara is the colour of Jambūnada gold” — the body purple-gold, the face Jambūnada gold, two colours within one body. The readings handed down set up an outline item here on purpose, and called it just that: “the colour of the face differs from the colour of the body.”

A sūtra written to such a pitch that even a bodhisattva’s face being of a different colour from his body must be marked out on its own.

In His Light, There Is You

In the passage that marks the bodily marks in general there is one sentence of a very singular kind:

“In the light of his whole body the beings of the five destinies and all their forms appear.”

Within the light of his whole body, the beings of the five destinies and every form there is appear inside that light.

The light of the contemplations before shone outward — shining everywhere over the ten directions, everywhere over that jeweled land. The light of this sentence gathers inward: sentient beings appear inside his light.

The sūtra offers no explanation of this; it simply writes it so.

The Standing Buddha upon His Head

Next comes the heavenly crown: “Within that heavenly crown there stands a manifested Buddha, twenty-five yojanas high.”

A bodhisattva, bearing a Buddha upon the crown of his head — and that Buddha is standing.

One line of reading sets down five characters here: “he bears the fruit while walking the cause.”

The fruit is already upon his head; the cause is still being walked beneath his feet.

A Pair of Hands

Then come the hands.

The palms show the colours of five hundred koṭis of mixed lotus flowers; on the ten fingers, at each finger-tip there are eighty-four thousand lines, like the lines of a seal; each line has eighty-four thousand colours; each colour has eighty-four thousand rays of light.

The numbers turn upward again. But this time, when the turning is done, where it comes down is utterly concrete:

“That light is soft, and it shines everywhere upon all; with these jeweled hands he receives sentient beings and draws them in.”

Adornment heaped up in koṭis upon koṭis, and at the end a single hand held out.

And of the nature of that light the sūtra gives two characters only: soft.

Lifting the Foot and Setting It Down

The feet too are written in two motions.

When he lifts a foot, the mark of the thousand-spoked wheel beneath it becomes of itself five hundred koṭis of daises of light; when he sets a foot down, there are adamantine maṇi flowers scattered so widely that nothing is left unfilled.

Lifted, a dais; set down, a flower. A bodhisattva walks, and this is what becomes of the ground he has walked over.

The readings handed down give this section the outline name “the mark of the feet having the working of virtue” — the virtue is nowhere else than in the place where those feet come down. Where the sūtra writes of the hands it says “receives and draws in”; where it writes of the feet it says nothing of any use they serve, but only what appears in the lifting and the setting down. Whether it can be put to use, it does not add a word about.

“No Different from a Buddha’s,” and Then “Do Not Match the World-Honored One”

The weightiest judgment of the passage stands here:

“As for the rest of his bodily marks, the several excellences are complete, no different from a Buddha’s; only the fleshy protuberance on the crown and the mark of the invisible crown do not match the World-Honored One.”

As for the rest of his bodily marks, the several excellences are all complete, and there is no difference from a Buddha.

Only two do not reach: the fleshy protuberance on the crown, and the mark of the invisible crown.

This is the one place in the whole sūtra where it is said outright that the body contemplated falls short of the Buddha in two respects.

The readings handed down state these two characters quite plainly: master and disciple differ in position, and the fruit of his vows is not yet full, and therefore these two marks are wanting — a place of “insufficiency” is used to mark that he still stands upon the ground of the cause.

The sūtra writes with the utmost economy. It does not say therefore you must strive, nor does it say he is in fact already a Buddha and merely displays this. It writes the four characters “do not match the World-Honored One,” and moves on.

And by the time we have read this far we have in fact been told something: in this sūtra, position and rank are recorded as they are. The marks and excellences may be counted upward by eighty-four thousands, but of the two that ought not to reach, not one of them is granted more.

Merely Hearing the Name

After the manner of contemplation, the Buddha calls Ānanda once again and adds a passage of benefit:

“One who makes this contemplation will not meet with calamities; he purely removes karmic obstruction, and removes the offences of birth-and-death of countless kalpas.”

Then comes a sentence lighter still: “Of a bodhisattva such as this, merely to hear his name is to obtain measureless merit — how much more to contemplate him closely!”

Merely to hear his name is to gain measureless merit; how much more to contemplate him closely.

The tone of this sentence is that of raising the light to show the weighty — first the easiest thing, and then the hard one. And in passing it settles a further matter: the capacity this contemplation reaches down to is as low as an ear that has once heard.

Not Meeting with Calamities

The benefit has an earlier sentence still: “One who makes this contemplation will not meet with calamities; he purely removes karmic obstruction, and removes the offences of birth-and-death of countless kalpas.”

Three things: not meeting with calamities; purely removing karmic obstruction; removing the offences of birth-and-death of countless kalpas.

The first belongs to the present life, the second to the ground of the mind, the third to kalpas beyond reckoning. Three things laid out from near to far — and the one placed first is the plainest of all: not meeting with disaster.

The sūtra does not turn it into a guarantee; and the person to whom these three benefits are tied is written in the four characters at the head of the sentence itself — the one who makes this contemplation. It merely sets them out like this, and goes on to speak of the manner of contemplation.

Of the three, the one spoken of first is also the one closest to daily use; the sūtra puts it at the head and not at the end as a conclusion.

Where to Begin

Last comes the manner of contemplation, and these are the two most practical sentences of the contemplation:

“If there is anyone who wishes to contemplate the Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara, he should first contemplate the fleshy protuberance on the crown, next contemplate the heavenly crown. The rest of the many marks he should likewise contemplate in order.”

First the fleshy protuberance, next the heavenly crown.

And that place just now said not to match the World-Honored One is precisely the fleshy protuberance. The first place the sūtra teaches one to begin is exactly the place where he falls short. The sūtra does not point the contrast out; it merely goes on speaking in order.

The test of it is still the old sentence: “letting them all be clear and distinct, as though he were looking at the palm of his own hand.”

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Pair of Hands

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same pair of hands, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He divides this contemplation into fifteen sentences, and beneath the general marking of the bodily marks divides again into six matters: the size of the body, the colour of the body differing from a Buddha’s, the fleshy protuberance differing from a Buddha’s spiral topknot, the size of the circular radiance, how many the manifested Buddhas and their attendants are, and the light of the body making the beings of the five destinies appear everywhere; the single sentence on the hands he divides into six matters again, ending in “with these hands of jeweled light he receives and draws in those who have the connection.” The meaning of the two marks that do not reach comes from him — “master and disciple differ in position, and the fruit of his vows is not yet full, so that the two marks are wanting, showing that he dwells in a place of insufficiency.” He reads Avalokiteśvara as belonging to “the common direct recompense”; and the image of Avalokiteśvara formed in the eighth contemplation, the contemplation of the image, is provisional, while the true form-body of this contemplation is true. The whole contemplation he gathers up in two clauses: “This is Avalokiteśvara: his vows are weighty and his reflection appears in the ten directions; his jeweled hands rest their radiance and receive and draw beings in according to their capacities.”

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He divides this contemplation into three items: gathering up what is above, directly clarifying the contemplation of the bodhisattva’s body, and the wrong and right of the contemplation; and beneath the contemplation of the bodily marks he divides into three again: contemplating the bodily marks, clarifying wherein he is the same as and differs from a Buddha, and again raising the benefit and exhorting cultivation. The meaning he brings out in this contemplation is a single sentence — the standing manifested Buddha in the crown “bears the fruit while walking the cause”; and the gloss he brings out is a single entry — Shijiapilengqie is rendered “Able and Holy.” The opening sentence he cites reads “again you should contemplate the Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara,” which differs from the base text’s “next you should also contemplate,” the recension he relied on diverging in that one character.

One line reads this body as one who receives and leads, weighty in vow and with hands that rest their radiance, and measures it by the sameness and difference of mark upon mark and by the insufficiency of rank; the other reads it as the dharma-body of a bodhisattva who bears the fruit while walking the cause, and stops at six lines.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: with these jeweled hands he receives sentient beings and draws them in.

觀大勢至色身相11 Contemplation of the Form-Body of Mahāsthāmaprāpta

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

十六觀走到第十一觀,三聖的身相就看完了。

這一觀的起句極省:「佛告阿難及韋提希」的重起仍在,而所說只是「次觀大勢至菩薩」七個字,說完就轉入身相,沒有前一觀那樣『見某某了了分明已』的承接。(那八字之重起,宋、元、明、敦煌本與流布本皆無,屬異讀。)善導《觀經四帖疏》仍分十三句,逐相坐實;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》只分三科,並明說這一觀「略無觀法」,因為和上一觀不異,所以不重說。兩家的處置判然有別,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

先說一樣,再說不一樣

「此菩薩身量大小亦如觀世音」。

一開口就是「亦如」。身量、身色、面相、身光相好、毫相舒光,五樣都同上一位。

然後經文才開始說不同的:「圓光面各二百二十五由旬,照二百五十由旬。」

上一觀的圓光是「面各百千由旬」。這一位的圓光,經文給了確數。

先立同,再標異。十六觀寫菩薩身相的兩段,一段以「如佛無異」收尾而標出二處不及,一段以「亦如觀世音」起頭而逐項標出不同——一個收在異上,一個起在異上。

名字是怎麼來的

接下來是這一觀最特別的地方:經文自己解釋了兩個名字。

「但見此菩薩一毛孔光,即見十方無量諸佛淨妙光明,是故號此菩薩名無邊光。」

只要見到他一個毛孔的光,就見到十方無量諸佛清淨微妙的光明——所以叫無邊光。

「以智慧光普照一切,令離三塗,得無上力,是故號此菩薩名大勢至。」

以智慧的光普照一切,使人離開三途,得到無上的力——所以叫大勢至。

十六觀之中,自己說出所觀者何以有此名的,只有這一觀。

歷來的讀法把這兩個名分成兩種立法:前一個是依光立名,後一個是依德立名。而智慧光之所以叫智慧光,是因為它以無漏為體;之所以叫無上力,是因為它能除息十方三惡道的苦——一個是體,一個是用。

我們讀到的次序其實是倒過來的:經文先給了果——見一個毛孔的光就見十方諸佛——然後才回過頭來安那個名字。名在後,事在先。

「一毛孔光」四個字也值得停一下。舉最少的,來顯最多的益處——為的是讓修的人心裡生起渴仰,肯進到觀裡去證它。

「有緣眾生皆悉得見」

在二名之間,經文插了一句很短的話:「有緣眾生皆悉得見。」

前面說他全身的光明照著十方國土,作紫金色。照是普照的,看見的卻是有緣的眾生。

歷來的讀法把這一句坐實了:唯有和這一位宿世有業緣的人,才得以看見、觸到這道光。

這和第九觀那一句「念佛眾生攝取不捨」是同一種寫法——光沒有選擇,接得上接不上,在另一頭。

而經文緊接著就把門開回來:只要見到這位菩薩一個毛孔的光,就見到十方無量諸佛清淨微妙的光明。舉最少的顯最多的——我們手上能有的,往往就只是那樣一點。

天冠上的五百座臺

「此菩薩天冠有五百寶蓮華;一一寶華有五百寶臺。一一臺中,十方諸佛淨妙國土廣長之相,皆於中現。」

五百朵華,每一朵有五百座臺,每一座臺裡現出十方諸佛的淨土。

歷來的讀法在此加了一句很細的話:他方的國土現在這裡,兩邊都沒有增減。

現在這一頭的,不從那一頭少去。

頭上的那個瓶子

「頂上肉髻如鉢頭摩花。於肉髻上有一寶瓶,盛諸光明,普現佛事。」

上一位頭頂的天冠中有一尊站立的化佛;這一位頭頂的肉髻上有一個寶瓶。

後來讀這部經的人,都拿這兩樣分辨二位大士:一個頭上有立化佛,一個頭上有寶瓶。整部經寫了那麼多相好,最後認人的記號,就是這兩件。

行的時候,坐的時候

然後是全段最有動勢的兩句。

「此菩薩行時,十方世界一切震動,當地動處各有五百億寶花。」

他走路,十方世界都跟著動;動到哪裡,哪裡就有五百億朵寶花。

「此菩薩坐時,七寶國土一時動搖。」

他坐下,七寶國土一時動搖。

一行一坐,都不是他一個人的事。

而坐下之後所引出的景象,是整個定善部分最大的一幕:從下方的金光佛剎,到上方的光明王佛剎,中間無量塵數的分身無量壽佛、分身觀世音、分身大勢至,全都雲集到極樂國土,密密地佈滿虛空,坐在蓮華座上說法。

從第七觀的一座花,到這裡的滿空分身——定善這一路,是從一朵花走到一片天的。

「度苦眾生」

而說法的目的,經文只給了四個字:「度苦眾生。」

這四個字在此處是有疑問的。因為別的經上說得很清楚:那個國土的眾生沒有眾苦,只受諸樂,所以叫極樂。既然無苦,這裡的分身在度誰的苦?

歷來的讀法把這一問正面接下來,答得很細:

苦樂要分兩種說。三界裡的苦樂,苦就是三途八苦,樂就是人天五欲放逸繫縛之樂——那種樂雖然叫樂,其實是大苦,畢竟沒有一念真實的樂。

而淨土裡的苦樂是另一回事:地前的位次比起地上,就算苦;地上比起地前,就算樂。下品的證比起上品的證,就算苦;上品比起下品,就算樂。

所以這裡說的「度苦眾生」,是進下位的人到上位去、把下品的證轉成上品的證。稱了他本來所求的,就叫作樂。

若不這樣講,那個國土裡一切聖人都以無漏為體、以大悲為用,畢竟常住,離了分段的生滅——還能就哪一義叫作苦呢?

這一問一答,把「極樂」二字往深處推了一層。無苦,不等於無可進;沒有生滅的苦,還有位次上下的分。

我們慣常把那裡讀成一個終點。而照這個讀法,那裡仍有上下、仍有轉進,只是所轉的不再是三界裡那一種。

兩位一起收

全觀之末不只結一位:「此觀成已,名為具足觀觀世音及大勢至。」

第十觀結的是一位,這一觀結的是兩位。

而中間那幾句利益,也把兩觀的果一併給了:除滅無數劫阿僧祇生死的罪;作這樣觀的人,不入胞胎,常常遊於諸佛清淨微妙的國土。

「不處胞胎」四個字,是這一路正報觀所許的果裡最具體的一個。

承衍——兩副眼看同一個寶瓶

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一個寶瓶,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他分本觀為十三句:等類觀音之五事、圓光不同之四事、身光照益之八事、天冠與觀音不同之四事、行不同之四事、坐不同之七事,逐項比對前觀而標其同異。二名之訓出於他——無邊光是依光立名,大勢至是依德立名,智慧光以無漏為體、以除息三惡之苦為用。「度苦眾生」之問答亦出於他,三界苦樂與淨土苦樂之分是他所立。他所牒的「圓光面各百二十五由旬」與底本「二百二十五」不同,所據之本於此一字有異。全觀他以三句收之:「斯乃勢至威高坐搖他國,能使分身雲集演法利生,永絕胞胎常遊法界。」

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他分本觀為三科:因光神力制二種名、與觀音同異、勸修;並明說「略無觀法,當不異上,故不重明」。他於此處補了一句總的次第之義:所以觀佛要先作像想、後觀法身,是因為佛的法身妙極,不能一下子就觀,先作像想觀熟了,後觀法身就容易;而菩薩則直明法身。至於二大士何以要觀,他說:觀佛既然完了,這兩位大士是眷屬莊嚴——像王來了自然有隨從,有佛就必定有菩薩。他所牒的「除無量劫罪」與底本「無數劫阿僧祇」不同。

一路把這一身讀成與前觀逐項比對的相,量到光的體與用;一路把它讀成佛之眷屬莊嚴,六行而止。

而經自己只說了一句:此觀成已,名為具足觀觀世音及大勢至。

With the eleventh of the sixteen contemplations, the bodily marks of the three holy ones have all been seen.

The opening of this contemplation is spare in the extreme: the fresh start at “The Buddha told Ānanda and Vaidehī” is still there, but what is said comes to no more than the seven characters of “next contemplate the Bodhisattva Mahāsthāmaprāpta,” and with that it turns straight to the bodily marks, without the join of the contemplation before, once so-and-so has been seen clear and distinct. (That fresh start of eight characters is absent from the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Dunhuang witnesses and from the current-circulation printing; it is a variant reading.) Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles still divides the passage into thirteen sentences and fixes each mark in place; Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life divides it into three items only, and says outright that in this contemplation “there is next to no method of contemplation,” since it does not differ from the one before and so is not stated again. The two houses handle it in plainly different ways, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

First What Is the Same, Then What Is Not

“This bodhisattva’s body is the same in size as Avalokiteśvara’s.”

The very first words are “the same as.” The measure of the body, its colour, the features of the face, the marks and light of the body, the outpouring and transformation of the light of the tuft — in all five he is as the one before.

Only then does the sūtra begin on what is not the same: “His circular radiance is two hundred and twenty-five yojanas on each side, and shines two hundred and fifty yojanas.”

The circular radiance of the contemplation before was “a hundred thousand yojanas on each side.” For the circular radiance of this figure the sūtra gives an exact number.

First the sameness is established, and then the difference is marked. Of the two passages among the sixteen contemplations that write the bodily marks of a bodhisattva, one ends with “no different from a Buddha’s” and then marks out two places that do not reach, while the other opens with “the same as Avalokiteśvara” and then marks out the differences item by item — one closes on difference, the other opens on it.

Where the Names Came From

Now comes the most singular thing in this contemplation: the sūtra explains two names of its own accord.

“Merely to see the light of a single pore of this bodhisattva is at once to see the pure and wondrous light of the measureless buddhas of the ten directions — for this reason this bodhisattva is named Boundless Light.”

Merely to see the light of one of his pores is to see the pure and wondrous light of the measureless buddhas of the ten directions — and so he is named Boundless Light.

“With the light of wisdom he shines everywhere upon all, making them leave the three evil destinies and gain unsurpassed power — for this reason this bodhisattva is named Mahāsthāmaprāpta.”

With the light of wisdom he shines everywhere upon all, making them leave the three evil destinies and gain unsurpassed power — and so he is named Mahāsthāmaprāpta.

Among the sixteen contemplations, this is the only one in which the sūtra says of itself why the one contemplated bears the name he bears.

The readings handed down divide the two names into two ways of naming: the first is named from the light, the second named from the virtue. And the light of wisdom is called the light of wisdom because it has what is free of outflows for its substance; it is called unsurpassed power because it can quench the suffering of the three evil destinies throughout the ten directions — the one is substance, the other is function.

The order in which we read it is in fact reversed: the sūtra gives the fruit first — see the light of a single pore and you see the buddhas of the ten directions — and only then turns back to set the name upon it. The name comes after; the matter comes first.

The four characters “the light of a single pore” are worth pausing over as well. The least is raised in order to show the greatest benefit — and this so that one who cultivates may have longing and thirst arise in him, and be willing to enter the contemplation and verify it.

“Sentient Beings Who Have the Connection Are All Able to See It”

Between the two names the sūtra inserts one very short sentence: “Sentient beings who have the connection are all able to see it.”

Just above, the light of his whole body was said to shine upon the lands of the ten directions and show as purple-gold. The shining is everywhere; those who see it are the beings who have the connection.

The readings handed down fix this sentence in place: only those who have a karmic connection with him from lives past come to see and to be touched by this light.

This is written in the same way as the sentence of the ninth contemplation, “sentient beings who recollect the Buddha are gathered in and not forsaken” — the light makes no choice; whether the connection is made or missed lies at the other end.

And the sūtra at once opens the door again: merely to see the light of a single pore of this bodhisattva is to see the pure and wondrous light of the measureless buddhas of the ten directions. The least is raised to show the greatest — and what we have in hand is often no more than that little.

The Five Hundred Daises on the Heavenly Crown

“This bodhisattva’s heavenly crown has five hundred jeweled lotus flowers; each jeweled flower has five hundred jeweled daises. Within each dais the pure and wondrous lands of the buddhas of the ten directions, in all their length and breadth, appear.”

Five hundred flowers, each with five hundred daises, and in every dais the pure lands of the buddhas of the ten directions appear.

The readings handed down add a very fine remark here: the lands of the other quarters appear in this place, and neither end is increased or diminished by it.

What appears at this end is not subtracted from that end.

The Vase upon His Head

“The fleshy protuberance on his crown is like a botoumo flower. Upon the fleshy protuberance there is a jeweled vase, holding all manner of lights and showing everywhere the deeds of a Buddha.”

Within the heavenly crown on the head of the one before there stood a manifested Buddha; upon the fleshy protuberance on the head of this one there is a jeweled vase.

Those who read this sūtra in later ages have all told the two great beings apart by just these two things: one with a standing manifested Buddha on his head, the other with a jeweled vase. For all the marks and excellences the sūtra has written out, the sign by which they are known at the last is these two.

When He Walks, When He Sits

Then come the two sentences with the most motion in the whole passage.

“When this bodhisattva walks, all the worlds of the ten directions quake; and wherever the ground quakes there are five hundred koṭis of jeweled flowers.”

He walks, and the worlds of the ten directions move with him; and wherever they move, there are five hundred koṭis of jeweled flowers.

“When this bodhisattva sits, the lands of the seven precious substances shake all at once.”

He sits down, and the lands of the seven precious substances shake all at once.

A walking and a sitting, and neither is his own affair alone.

And the scene drawn out by that sitting down is the largest in the whole part on the good done in concentration: from the buddha-field of Golden Light below to the buddha-field of the King of Light above, in the space between them divided bodies of the Buddha of Measureless Life measureless as the motes of dust, and divided bodies of Avalokiteśvara and of Mahāsthāmaprāpta, all gathering like clouds in the land of Ultimate Bliss, thronging the open sky, seated upon lotus seats and expounding the Dharma.

From the single Flower Throne of the seventh contemplation to the divided bodies filling the sky here — this road of the good done in concentration goes from one flower to a whole heaven.

“Delivering Suffering Sentient Beings”

And for the purpose of that expounding the sūtra gives four characters only: “delivering suffering sentient beings.”

Here those four characters raise a question. For another sūtra says plainly that the sentient beings of that land have no sufferings at all and receive only pleasures, and that this is why it is called Ultimate Bliss. If there is no suffering, whose suffering are these divided bodies delivering?

The readings handed down take the question head on and answer it in detail:

Suffering and pleasure must be spoken of in two kinds. In the three realms, suffering is the three evil destinies and the eight sufferings, and pleasure is the pleasure of the five desires of gods and men, indulgent and binding — a pleasure that, though called pleasure, is in truth great suffering, with never a single thought of real pleasure in it.

Suffering and pleasure in the Pure Land are another matter: measured against the stages of the grounds, what is below the grounds counts as suffering; measured against what is below them, the grounds count as pleasure. Measured against the higher verification, the lower verification counts as suffering; measured against the lower, the higher counts as pleasure.

So “delivering suffering sentient beings” here means advancing those in a lower station to a higher one, and turning the lower verification into the higher. To answer what one originally sought for is what is called pleasure.

Were it not read in this way — since in that land all the holy ones have what is free of outflows for their substance and great compassion for their function, abiding forever and parted from the arising and ceasing of apportioned birth-and-death — in what sense could anything there still be called suffering?

This one question and answer push the two words “Ultimate Bliss” a layer deeper. No suffering does not mean nothing further to advance to; where there is no suffering of arising and ceasing, there is still the division of higher and lower in station.

We are accustomed to reading that place as a terminus. On this reading there is still higher and lower there, still a turning and advancing — only what is turned is no longer of the kind found in the three realms.

Two Gathered Up Together

The end of this contemplation gathers up not one figure but two: “When this contemplation has been accomplished, it is called the complete contemplation of Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta.”

The tenth contemplation gathered up one; this one gathers up two.

And the few sentences of benefit in between give the fruit of both contemplations together: it removes the offences of birth-and-death of countless kalpas, asaṃkhyeya in number; one who makes this contemplation is not lodged in the womb, and constantly roams the pure and wondrous lands of the buddhas.

The four characters “Not lodged in the womb” are the most concrete of all the fruits granted along this road of contemplating the direct recompense.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Jeweled Vase

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same jeweled vase, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He divides this contemplation into thirteen sentences: five matters in which he is of a kind with Avalokiteśvara, four in which the circular radiance differs, eight in the shining and benefiting of the light of the body, four in which the heavenly crown differs from Avalokiteśvara’s, four in which the walking differs, seven in which the sitting differs — comparing each item with the contemplation before and marking where it is the same and where not. The glossing of the two names comes from him: Boundless Light is named from the light, Mahāsthāmaprāpta named from the virtue, and the light of wisdom has what is free of outflows for its substance and the quenching of the suffering of the three evil destinies for its function. The question and answer on “delivering suffering sentient beings” comes from him too, and the division into suffering and pleasure in the three realms and suffering and pleasure in the Pure Land is his. What he cites, “the circular radiance is a hundred and twenty-five yojanas on each side,” differs from the base text’s “two hundred and twenty-five,” the recension he relied on diverging in that one character. The whole contemplation he gathers up in three clauses: “This, then, is Mahāsthāmaprāpta: his majesty is lofty, and when he sits he shakes the other lands; he can make divided bodies gather like clouds, expound the Dharma and benefit the living, cut off the womb forever and roam constantly in the dharma-realm.”

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He divides this contemplation into three items: the setting up of the two names by the spiritual power of the light, the sameness and difference with Avalokiteśvara, and the exhortation to cultivate; and he says outright that “there is next to no method of contemplation; it should be no different from the one above, and so it is not clarified again.” He adds here one general remark on the order of the contemplations: the reason one first forms the image and only afterward contemplates the dharma-body of the Buddha is that the Buddha’s dharma-body is wondrous in the extreme and cannot be contemplated at one stroke — form the image first until it comes freely, and the later contemplation of the dharma-body is easy; whereas with a bodhisattva the dharma-body is directly clarified. As to why the two great beings are contemplated at all, he says: the contemplation of the Buddha being finished, these two great beings are the adornment of his retinue — as when a king comes there are of course attendants in train, and where there is a Buddha there must be bodhisattvas. What he cites, “it removes the offences of measureless kalpas,” differs from the base text’s “countless kalpas, asaṃkhyeya in number.”

One line reads this body as marks compared item by item with the contemplation before, and measures it by the substance and the function of the light; the other reads it as the adornment of the Buddha’s retinue, and stops at six lines.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: when this contemplation has been accomplished, it is called the complete contemplation of Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta.

普觀想12 The Universal Contemplation

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

十六觀走到這裡,已經看過了落日、大水、寶地、寶樹、八功德水、樓閣、華座,看過了佛像,看過了無量壽佛的真身,也看過了觀世音與大勢至。所觀之境一路從此界的日輪,推到彼國的依報,再推到彼佛與二大士的正報。到第十二觀,經忽然把所觀之境挪了一個位置:這一次要看的,是作觀的那個人自己。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把本觀判作定善十三觀的第十二,分成六段:牒前生後、凝心入觀、定散無遺、觀成之益、總結、重舉能觀之人;他又把中間那一段拆成九個相續的想。智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》分得簡,只作二段,並先設一問:普觀和雜觀既然都在說佛菩薩,為什麼要分作兩觀?兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

一句話把人放進去

經文只用了一句:「見此事時當起想作心,自見生於西方極樂世界」。

前十一觀的句法都是「見」什麼、「觀」什麼——所觀之物在外,能觀之心在內,中間有一道界。這一句把那道界撤了:所觀的正是能觀的那一個。你不是站在此岸看彼國,是在定中看見自己已經在那裡。

而且不是含糊地『在那裡』,是有座位的——「於蓮華中結跏趺坐」。

前面第七觀已經把華座觀得極詳,那時的華座還是空的;到這一觀,座上坐了人。

一想接一想

接下來經文所教的,不是一個籠統的境,是一串動作。

先作蓮華合攏的想,再作蓮華開放的想。華開的時候,有五百種顏色的光來照在身上——這是第三個想。光照著身,眼睛才張開——這是第四個想。眼一張開,見到佛與菩薩滿在虛空之中——這是第五個想。

歷來的讀法把這一段拆成九個想:自生想、向西想、坐華想、華合想、華開想、寶光來照身想、眼開想、見佛菩薩想、聞法想。九個想一個接一個,前一個不成,後一個就無從起。

這個次第本身就是教法。它沒有讓人一步跳到「見佛菩薩滿虛空中」,而是從華合開始——先讓那朵花合起來,再讓它開。開了才有光。經把一件最終要成就的大事,切成了九個可以逐一著手的小事。

光照到身上

九想之中,經特別點出一個數目:「有五百色光來照身想」。

前面諸觀所說的光都在那一邊——第九觀說彼佛的圓光「如百億三千大千世界」,那是所觀之境上的光。到這一觀,光的去處變了:不是照在境上,是來照身。

而且被照的那個身,是自己剛剛想出來的、坐在蓮華中的那一個。

光一照,眼才開;眼一開,才見佛菩薩滿虛空中。次第不能顛倒:先被照,然後才看得見。

十六觀一路走來,所觀之境愈來愈勝,而能觀之人始終在境外。到這一想,境裡的光第一次落到能觀者身上——所觀與能觀之間那道界,是被光照掉的,不是被想掉的。

聲音要對得上

九想的最後一想是聞法。所聞的是什麼?

「水、鳥、樹林及與諸佛,所出音聲,皆演妙法」。

第五觀裡已經說過類似的話:那邊的水聲微妙,演說苦、空、無常、無我;那邊的鳥常讚念佛、念法、念僧。而這一觀多加了一句考語:「與十二部經合。」

十二部經是佛一代所說的全部體裁。所聞之聲要與它相合——這是一個判準,而且是可以核對的判準。定中聽見的若與佛所說的教不合,那就不是這一觀所許的境。

古來注家在此處說,這一段所明的是「定散無遺守心常憶」:定中如此,散心之時亦然,一則使觀心明淨,二則使諸惡不生。這是把一個驗證之法,說成了一種常態。

值得停一停的是這個判準的方向。它不是往上比——不是問你聽見的境界有多高、多稀有;它是往回對——問你聽見的和佛所說的教合不合。一個往上比的判準會讓人愈修愈孤,因為只有自己知道自己見到了什麼;一個往回對的判準卻是公共的,十二部經擺在那裡,誰都可以拿來比。

第一觀立的判準是「心境相應」,看的是所想與所現是不是同一個;第十二觀這一句立的是另一種相應,看的是所聞與所傳是不是同一路。兩個判準都不問高低,只問合不合。

真正的驗收在定外

然後是本觀最短、也最容易被讀過去的一句:「若出定時憶持不失。」

定中見得再好,起座就散了,這一觀不算成。要出了定,那個境還在記憶裡執持著、不曾失落,才算數。

第一觀的驗收是「閉目開目皆令明了」——閉眼睜眼都在。第十二觀的驗收是入定出定都在。同一條理路,量到了更遠的地方:從眼的開闔,量到定的出入。

我們大概都有過那種經驗:在某個安靜的時刻心裡明白得很,一回到日常就什麼都不剩。經在這裡立的標準,正是衝著這件事來的。

而經在說完「憶持不失」之後,緊接的一句是「見此事已,名見無量壽佛極樂世界」。到這裡才算「見」了。

前面十一觀所見的是那個國土的一件一件——地、樹、池、樓、座、像、佛身、二大士;這一句所見的,是「無量壽佛極樂世界」合起來的那一整個。

驗收的那一關過了,前面看過的一切才被追認為一次真正的見。

方向反了過來

最後兩句,經把主語換了。

前面通篇是行人去看佛。到這裡是:「無量壽佛化身無數,與觀世音及大勢至,常來至此行人之所。」

無數的化身,與兩位大士,常常來到這個修行人的所在。

不是行人到那邊去,是那邊到這裡來。而且不是一次,是「常來」。

古來的讀法把這一句判作能觀之人所蒙的護念之益,並說到此地步的人,是「注念願見西方依正二嚴,了了常如眼見」。所觀的那一邊既已在心中了了如眼見,那一邊也就常在此人之所。一個往生的想,作到這裡,已經不只是想去哪裡的事了。

十六觀走到這裡

從第一觀到第十一觀,經教的是把心一寸一寸地移到那一邊:先看此界的落日,再看彼國的地、樹、池、樓、座,再看佛與二大士。所觀愈勝,能觀之心也就愈難跟得上。

第十二觀不再往上加了。它掉過頭來,把已經看過的那一切,收成一個「自見生於西方極樂世界」的想。

前面所觀的是那個國土有什麼;這一觀所觀的是你在那個國土裡。

而經接下來所教的,不是更高的境,是一串很家常的動作:坐下、花合、花開、光照、張眼、看見、聽見。這一串裡,光、佛菩薩、法音都是前十一觀說過的;而花的合、花的開,以及「眼目開想」這一想,是到這一觀才頭一次擺出來的。它把散在十一觀裡的東西,收在一個人身上重演了一遍,又補上了自己受生那一刻的樣子。

所以這一觀不是第十二個新東西,是前十一觀的一次總攝;新添的那幾樣,也只是把受生那一刻補上。

承衍——兩副眼看同一個「自見」

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一個「自見生於西方極樂世界」,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把本觀開成六段,並把「當起自心」以下拆成九個相續的想,一想一標,是本觀分段之最細處。他釋「與十二部經合」不從名目上釋,而從效上釋:「一則觀心明淨,二則諸惡不生。由內與法樂相應,外則無三邪之障。」末後那一句「常來至此行人之所」,他判作行人所蒙的三身護念之益,並以「了了常如眼見」狀其境。在他,本觀是行門一階一階的落實。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他不細分九想,只作二段:初作自身往想,次佛菩薩化身來現。他更在意的是一個判教上的問題——普觀與雜觀何以要分作兩觀?他的答是:「普觀作自身往想,稱彼境界一一具觀。」而雜觀所明的是佛菩薩神力自在、大小不定、隨物而現,所以名之為雜。一個是境定而觀全,一個是境不定而現隨機——分別在此。

一路把它讀成九級可拾的階,一路把它讀成兩種境的分界。

而經自己只說了一句:見此事時,當起想作心,自見生於西方極樂世界。

By the time the sixteen contemplations have come this far, the setting sun has been seen, and the great water, the jeweled ground, the jeweled trees, the water of the eight excellent qualities, the storeyed pavilions, and the Flower Throne; the image of the Buddha has been seen, and the true body of the Buddha of Measureless Life, and Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta as well. The object contemplated has been pushed all the way from the sun’s orb of this world to the dependent recompense of that land, and on to the direct recompense of that Buddha and the two great beings. At the twelfth contemplation the sūtra suddenly moves that object to a different place: what is to be seen this time is the very person who is doing the contemplating.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles judges this contemplation to be the twelfth of the thirteen of the good done in concentration and divides it into six segments: citing what precedes and giving rise to what follows, gathering the mind into contemplation, neither concentration nor scattering left out, the benefit of the contemplation accomplished, the general conclusion, and the raising again of the one who contemplates; and he further breaks the middle segment into nine consecutive images. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life divides more sparely, making only two segments, and poses a question first: since both the universal contemplation and the mixed speak of the Buddha and the bodhisattvas, why should they be made two contemplations? The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

One Sentence Puts the Person Inside

The sūtra uses a single sentence: “When you see this matter you should raise up thought and image and set your mind upon it, and see for yourself that you are born in the world of Ultimate Bliss in the west.”

The sentence pattern of the first eleven contemplations was always “see” this, “contemplate” that — the thing contemplated outside, the mind that contemplates within, and a boundary running between them. This sentence takes the boundary away: what is contemplated is precisely the one who contemplates. You are not standing on this shore looking at that land; in concentration you see that you are already there.

And not vaguely there, either. There is a seat: “seated cross-legged within a lotus.”

The seventh contemplation had already contemplated the Flower Throne in the fullest detail, and the throne then was still empty. At this contemplation someone is sitting on it.

One Image After Another

What the sūtra teaches next is not a vague object but a string of actions.

First form the image of the lotus closing, then form the image of the lotus opening. When the flower opens, rays of five hundred colours come and shine upon the body — that is the third image. With the light shining on the body, the eyes then open — that is the fourth. With the eyes open, one sees buddhas and bodhisattvas filling the whole of space — that is the fifth.

The readings handed down break this stretch into nine images: the image of one’s own birth there, the image of facing the west, the image of sitting upon the flower, the image of the flower closing, the image of the flower opening, the image of the jeweled light coming to shine upon the body, the image of the eyes opening, the image of seeing buddhas and bodhisattvas, and the image of hearing the Dharma. Nine images, one after another; if the one before is not accomplished, the one after has nothing to rise from.

This order is itself the teaching. It does not let anyone leap in one step to seeing buddhas and bodhisattvas fill the whole of space; it begins from the flower closing — first let that flower close, then let it open. Only when it has opened is there light. The sūtra takes one great matter that is to be accomplished at the end and cuts it into nine small ones, each of which can be taken up in turn.

The Light Shines on the Body

Among the nine images, the sūtra singles out one number: “rays of five hundred colours come and shine upon the body — so form the image.”

All the light spoken of in the earlier contemplations was over on that side. The ninth contemplation said that the circular radiance of that Buddha is “like a hundred koṭis of the three-thousandfold great-thousand world-system” — that is light upon the object contemplated. At this contemplation the destination of the light changes: it does not shine upon the object; it comes and shines upon the body.

And the body it shines upon is the one you have just now formed as an image, seated within the lotus.

The light shines, and only then do the eyes open; the eyes open, and only then are buddhas and bodhisattvas seen filling the whole of space. The order cannot be reversed: first one is shone upon, and only then can one see.

All the way through the sixteen contemplations the object contemplated grows more and more excellent while the person who contemplates stays outside the object. At this image the light within the object falls for the first time upon the one contemplating — the boundary between what is contemplated and what contemplates is dissolved by light, not by imaging.

The Sounds Have to Match

The last of the nine images is hearing the Dharma. And what is it that is heard?

“The sounds put forth by the water, the birds, the groves of trees, and all the buddhas are all setting forth the wondrous Dharma.”

The fifth contemplation had already said something like this: the sound of the water there is subtle and wondrous, setting forth suffering, emptiness, impermanence, and non-self; the birds there constantly praise the recollection of the Buddha, of the Dharma, and of the Saṅgha. But this contemplation adds a further test: “it accords with the twelve divisions of the scriptures.”

The twelve divisions of the scriptures are the whole range of forms in which the Buddha taught in his lifetime. What is heard must accord with them — this is a criterion, and a criterion that can actually be checked. If what is heard in concentration does not accord with what the Buddha taught, then it is not an object this contemplation allows.

The commentators of old say that what this stretch clarifies is that neither concentration nor scattering is left out, the mind being guarded and constantly remembering: as in concentration, so also in a scattered mind; and the effect is twofold, that the contemplating mind becomes bright and pure, and that the several evils do not arise. That is to take a method of verification and state it as a settled condition.

What is worth pausing over is the direction in which this criterion points. It does not compare upward — it does not ask how high or how rare the object you heard was; it checks backward — it asks whether what you heard and what the Buddha taught agree. A criterion that compares upward leaves a person more and more alone the further he practises, because only he knows what he has seen. A criterion that checks backward is public: the twelve divisions of the scriptures are there for anyone, and anyone may hold his experience up against them.

The criterion set up at the first contemplation was “the correspondence of mind and object,” and what it watched was whether what was imaged and what appeared were the same. What this sentence of the twelfth contemplation sets up is a correspondence of another kind, and what it watches is whether what is heard and what has been handed down run the same way. Neither criterion asks about high or low. Both ask only whether the two things fit.

The Real Test Comes Outside Concentration

Then comes the shortest sentence in this contemplation, and the easiest to read past: “If you come out of concentration, you still remember and hold it and do not lose it.”

However well it is seen in concentration, if it scatters the moment one rises from the seat, this contemplation is not accomplished. One has to come out of concentration and find that the object is still held fast in memory and has not been lost. Only then does it count.

The test of the first contemplation was “let it be clear and distinct whether the eyes are closed or open” — present either way. The test of the twelfth is that it be present both in concentration and out of it. It is the same line of reasoning, measuring at a greater distance: from the opening and closing of the eyes to the entering and leaving of concentration.

Most of us have probably known the experience: at some quiet hour the mind is perfectly clear, and once ordinary life resumes there is nothing left of it. The standard the sūtra sets here is aimed at exactly that.

And having said “remember and hold it and do not lose it,” the sūtra says next: “When this matter has been seen, this is called seeing the world of Ultimate Bliss of the Buddha of Measureless Life.” Only here does it count as having seen.

What the eleven earlier contemplations saw were the items of that land one by one — the ground, the trees, the pool, the pavilions, the throne, the image, the Buddha’s body, the two great beings. What this sentence sees is the whole of it together: the world of Ultimate Bliss of the Buddha of Measureless Life.

Once that one test is passed, everything seen before it is acknowledged in retrospect as a real seeing.

The Direction Turns Around

In the last two sentences the sūtra changes the subject.

Everything so far has been the practitioner going to look at the Buddha. Here it is: “The manifested bodies of the Buddha of Measureless Life are numberless, and together with Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta they constantly come to the place of this practitioner.”

Numberless manifested bodies, and the two great beings, constantly coming to where this practitioner is.

It is not the practitioner going over there; it is that side coming here. And not once, but constantly.

The readings handed down judge this sentence to be the benefit of being guarded and kept in mind that the one who contemplates receives, and say of a person who has come this far that he is one who pours out his thought in the wish to see the twofold adornment of the west, dependent and direct, clear and distinct and constantly as though seen with the eye. Since that side is already clear and distinct in his mind as though seen with the eye, that side is also constantly at his place. An image of birth in that land, carried this far, is no longer merely a matter of where one wants to go.

Where the Sixteen Contemplations Have Come

From the first contemplation to the eleventh, what the sūtra teaches is the moving of the mind inch by inch over to that side: first the setting sun of this world, then the ground, trees, pool, pavilions, and throne of that land, then the Buddha and the two great beings. The more excellent the object, the harder for the contemplating mind to keep up.

The twelfth contemplation adds nothing further upward. It turns about and gathers everything already seen into one image: seeing for oneself that one is born in the world of Ultimate Bliss in the west.

What the earlier contemplations contemplated was what that land contains; what this one contemplates is you inside that land.

And what the sūtra teaches next is not a higher object but a string of very homely actions: sit down, the flower closes, the flower opens, the light shines, the eyes open, one sees, one hears. Of these, the light, the buddhas and bodhisattvas, and the sound of the Dharma have all been spoken of in the eleven contemplations before; the closing of the flower, the opening of the flower, and the image of the eyes opening are set out for the first time only here. It takes what was scattered through eleven contemplations and re-enacts it on one person, and adds what was missing: the look of the moment of one’s own birth there.

So this contemplation is not a twelfth new thing. It is a gathering up of the eleven before it; and the few things newly added only fill in that one moment of being born.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Seeing of Oneself

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same seeing for oneself that one is born in the world of Ultimate Bliss in the west, looked at in two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary in Four Fascicles. He opens this contemplation into six segments, and breaks the stretch from “one should raise up one’s own mind” onward into nine consecutive images, marking each one — the finest division of any passage in this contemplation. He explains “it accords with the twelve divisions of the scriptures” not from the roster of those divisions but from the effect: “first, the contemplating mind becomes bright and pure; second, the several evils do not arise. Because within there is correspondence with the joy of the Dharma, without there is no obstruction from the three wrong things.” The closing sentence, “they constantly come to the place of this practitioner,” he judges to be the benefit the practitioner receives of being guarded and kept in mind by the three bodies, and he states the manner of it as “clear and distinct and constantly as though seen with the eye.” For him this contemplation is the gate of practice, made good one step at a time.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He does not divide the nine images finely; he makes only two segments — first the forming of the image of one’s own body going there, then the manifested bodies of the Buddha and the bodhisattvas coming and appearing. What concerns him more is a question of doctrinal classification: why should the universal contemplation and the mixed be made two? His answer is: “the universal contemplation forms the image of one’s own body going there, and contemplates the objects of that land one by one, each complete.” What the mixed contemplation clarifies, on the other hand, is that the spiritual power of the Buddha and the bodhisattvas is unhindered, their size not fixed, appearing according to what is before them, and it is therefore named mixed. The one has a fixed object contemplated in full, the other an unfixed object appearing as occasion requires — the distinction lies there.

One line reads it as nine steps that can be climbed; the other reads it as the boundary between two kinds of object.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: when you see this matter you should raise up thought and image and set your mind upon it, and see for yourself that you are born in the world of Ultimate Bliss in the west.

雜想觀13 The Contemplation of Mixed Images

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

第九觀裡,經教人觀無量壽佛的真身:身高六十萬億那由他恒河沙由旬,眉間白毫如五須彌山,眼如四大海水。那是本經所出過的最大的一個量。

到了第十三觀,也就是定善的最後一觀,佛卻說:「先當觀於一丈六像在池水上。」

一丈六。這是這部經在境上做的一次明顯的減法。

這部經自地想以下各觀,是把境一路往大處說、往勝處說,以拔起人的心。這一觀反過來:它把所觀之物一路縮到一個人抬頭就看得見的高度。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把本觀開成十一段,逐句標其起訖,並在第二段就點出這是「易境轉心」;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》只作二段,而在前一觀就先設問:普觀與雜觀何以要分二?兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

經自己先承認了做不到

減法之前,經先說了一句實話。

「如先所說,無量壽佛身量無邊,非是凡夫心力所及。」

前面那個量,不是凡夫的心力夠得著的。這句話不是別人的評語,是經自己在下一觀裡回頭給前一觀下的注腳。

十六觀走到這裡,經沒有假裝十二觀都作成了。它把難處正面說了出來:那個境太大,這副心太小,接不住。

那麼憑什麼還能成

接下來的一句,是本觀的樞紐:

「然彼如來宿願力故,有憶想者必得成就。」

一個「然」字轉了過來。境大心小是實情,而成就之所繫並不在心力這一邊——在彼佛宿世的願力那一邊。凡有憶念想像的人,必定成就。

歷來的讀法在此下了一句很重的話:不是因為境小才容易成,也不是因為境大就不現,只是彌陀的願太重,以致凡是作想的人都成。

本經前十二觀,讀下來像是一部逐級加難的功課;到這一句,難易的軸心整個挪了位置。所觀之境可以縮小,能觀之心可以微弱,而所憑的那一邊沒有縮小過。

可以在哪裡想

經只說了一個地方:「先當觀於一丈六像在池水上。」

而歷來的讀法把這一句放寬了。古來注家列出可以住心作想的處所:池水華上、寶宮寶閣之內、寶林寶樹之下、寶臺寶殿之中、虛空寶雲華蓋之內——「如是等處一一住心想之,皆作化佛想」,其故是「為令機境相稱易得成故也」。

機境相稱,是這一觀的整個道理所在。境太大而機太小,接不上;把境調到接得上的地方,才成得了。

你若試過依前面幾觀作想,大概會認得這個難處:一個六十萬億那由他恒河沙由旬的身量,是想不起來的——不是不信,是心裡根本沒有那樣一個尺寸可以擺放它。而一丈六,是一個人抬頭看得見的高度。

經不是把佛改小了,是把入口改到手邊。

小的那一尊也是真的

境既然縮了,隨之而來的是一個疑:那個一丈六的小像,還是佛嗎?

經文的答不在辯論,在描述:「阿彌陀佛神通如意,於十方國變現自在。或現大身滿虛空中;或現小身丈六八尺。」

大身小身都是祂現的,都是「神通如意」四字底下的事。然後補一句斷語:「所現之形皆真金色」。

大小可以不同,色不改。圓光中的化佛與寶蓮花,也還是前面所說過的那一套。

古來注家在此點出:這一句真金之色,正是這一觀裡判正邪的地方。所觀的像若不是真金之色,那就不是這一觀所許的境——不論它現得多大或多小。

這個判法和第一觀是同一路。第一觀判正邪,不看境界高低,只看所想與所現是不是同一個;這一觀判真偽,也不看身量大小,只看色。判準都不在量上,在合不合上。

而經在說完大小二身之後,還補了一句回指:「圓光化佛及寶蓮花,如上所說。」——那尊縮小了的像,光相與前面所說的真身沒有兩樣。身量可以隨機,光相不隨機。

「如意」的兩種

經在說大小二身之前,先給了一個總的緣由:「阿彌陀佛神通如意,於十方國變現自在。」

「如意」二字,古來的讀法拆成兩重。

一重是如眾生的意:隨著眾生心裡所念的,都應其所需而度之。你心裡擺得下多大,祂就現多大。

另一重是如彌陀自己的意:五眼圓照,六通自在,觀察哪一個機可度,一念之中無前無後,身心等赴。

兩重合起來說的是同一件事:所現之身的大小,不是佛的限制,是機的尺寸。而這兩重之中,前一重是為你設的,後一重是祂自己的事。

認人只憑頭上那一件

本觀還有一個很實際的交代。

「觀世音菩薩及大勢至,於一切處身同眾生」。

這兩位在一切處所現的身,和眾生是一樣的。那怎麼認得出來?

「但觀首相,知是觀世音,知是大勢至」。

只看頭上。第十觀說過,觀世音的天冠之中有一尊立化佛;第十一觀說過,大勢至的肉髻之上有一個寶瓶。認人不必看全身,看那一件就夠。

而經接著說明他們何以在此:「此二菩薩助阿彌陀佛,普化一切。」

定善在這裡收尾

「是為雜想觀,名第十三觀。」

從第一觀的落日,到這一觀的丈六像,十三觀走完。韋提希當初求的是「教我思惟,教我正受」,這十三觀就是那兩句的答。

其下經要說的,不再是坐中所觀之境,而是九種人臨終所遇之事。

回頭看這十三觀的次第,會發現它並不是一路往上的。前六觀從日、水、地、樹、池到樓,是那個國土的地面;第七觀立華座,第八觀立像,第九觀見佛真身,第十、十一觀見二大士——這是一路往上。第十二觀把人放進去,第十三觀把佛縮回一丈六——這是往下、往回。

一部教觀想的經,在它的觀想部分結束的地方,做的不是登頂,是回身把門開低。

而那個低處的門上,仍舊寫著同一句話:所現之形皆真金色。所以這不是打了折扣的佛,是同一位佛在一個接得住的尺寸上現身。

定善走到最後一步,不是走到一個更高的境,是走回一個更小的像;而那個更小的像上,寫著的仍是同一句:所現之形皆真金色。

承衍——兩副眼看同一尊丈六像

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一尊池水上的丈六像,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把本觀開成十一段,逐句標其起訖。他釋教觀小像之故曰「此是如來教諸眾生易境轉心入觀」,並列出可作想之處:池水華上、寶宮寶閣、寶林寶樹下、寶臺寶殿中、虛空寶雲華蓋之內——「如是等處一一住心想之,皆作化佛想,為令機境相稱易得成故也」。他釋成就之所繫曰「直是彌陀願重,致使想者皆成」。二菩薩之別,他讀作「首」,故以觀音頭首上之立化佛、勢至頭首之上之寶瓶為別。他並以「佛大侍者亦大,佛小侍者亦小」一語,把主伴之相稱說在一處。本觀既竟,他即總收:日觀至華座觀是依報,像觀至雜想觀是正報,定善一門到此義竟。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他分得極簡,只作二段,而他在意的是眾人心裡的那個疑:前面聽的是廣大無量,如今聽的是觀小,會不會疑這不是佛身,因而對小像不生敬意?他的答是「所觀若大若小皆是佛身,拂去眾疑生人重意」——這一觀所做的,正是把那個疑拂掉。至於二菩薩之別,他所讀的是「手相」,故以其手柔軟、有八萬四千畫、以此寶手接引眾生為說;而他也把作「頭首」解者的說法一併錄下,末後斷云:「皆是經文,用無在也。」

一路讀成行門的降階以就機,一路讀成教門的拂疑以生敬。

而經自己只說了一句:所現之形皆真金色。

In the ninth contemplation the sūtra taught the contemplation of the true body of the Buddha of Measureless Life: a body six hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of yojanas, as many as the sands of the Gaṅgā, in height, the white tuft between the brows like five Mount Sumerus, the eyes like the water of the four great seas. That is the largest measure this sūtra ever sets out.

By the thirteenth contemplation, which is the last of the good done in concentration, the Buddha says instead: “They should first contemplate an image sixteen feet high upon the water of the pool.”

Sixteen feet. This is a plain subtraction the sūtra performs upon the object contemplated.

From the image of the ground onward this sūtra has been speaking of the object as larger and larger, more and more excellent, in order to lift a person’s mind. This contemplation goes the other way: it draws the thing contemplated all the way down to a height a person can see by raising his eyes.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles opens this contemplation into eleven segments, marking the beginning and end of each sentence, and in the second segment already points out that this is a changing of the object and a turning of the mind. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life makes only two segments, and at the contemplation before had already posed the question: why should the universal contemplation and the mixed be made two? The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

The Sūtra Itself Admits First That It Cannot Be Done

Before the subtraction, the sūtra says one plain thing.

“As was said before, the body of the Buddha of Measureless Life is measureless in its extent, and it is not within reach of the power of an ordinary person’s mind.”

That measure just given is not something the power of an ordinary person’s mind can reach. This sentence is not somebody else’s remark; it is the sūtra turning back in the next contemplation to gloss the one before.

Having come this far through the sixteen contemplations, the sūtra does not pretend that all twelve have been accomplished. It states the difficulty to its face: the object is too vast, this mind too small; it cannot be caught.

Then on What Ground Can It Still Be Accomplished

The sentence that follows is the pivot of this contemplation:

“Yet by the power of that Tathāgata’s vow of former lives, whoever remembers and forms the image will necessarily succeed.”

One word — yet — turns it about. That the object is vast and the mind small is the plain fact; but what accomplishment rests on is not the side of the mind’s power. It is the side of that Buddha’s vow of former lives. Whoever remembers and forms the image will necessarily succeed.

The readings handed down put this down very heavily: it is not that the small is therefore easy to accomplish, nor that the great therefore does not appear; it is simply that Amitābha’s vow is weighty, and so all who form the image succeed.

Read straight through, the first twelve contemplations of this sūtra look like an exercise that grows harder by degrees; at this sentence the whole axis of hard and easy shifts its place. The object contemplated may shrink and the contemplating mind may be feeble; the side that is relied upon has never shrunk at all.

Where One May Form the Image

The sūtra names only one place: “They should first contemplate an image sixteen feet high upon the water of the pool.”

And the readings handed down widen that sentence. The commentators of old list the places where the mind may be settled and the image formed: upon the flowers on the water of the pool, within the jeweled palaces and jeweled pavilions, beneath the jeweled groves and jeweled trees, within the jeweled terraces and jeweled halls, and inside the jeweled clouds and flower canopies of open space — “in places such as these, settling the mind on each in turn and forming the image of it, one forms in every case the image of a manifested Buddha,” and the reason is “that capacity and object may match each other and accomplishment may come easily.”

Capacity and object matching each other is the whole reasoning of this contemplation. If the object is too vast and the capacity too small, the two do not join; adjust the object to a place where they can join, and only then can it be accomplished.

If you have tried forming the image by the earlier contemplations, you will probably recognize the difficulty: a body six hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of yojanas, as many as the sands of the Gaṅgā, in height cannot be brought to mind — not from unbelief, but because there is simply no measure of that size in the mind in which to set it. And sixteen feet is a height a person can see by raising his eyes.

The sūtra has not made the Buddha smaller. It has moved the entrance to where the hand can reach.

The Small One Is True as Well

Once the object has shrunk, a doubt comes with it: is that small image of sixteen feet still the Buddha?

The sūtra’s answer is not argument but description: “Amitābha Buddha, in the spiritual power that is as he wills, manifesting freely in the lands of the ten directions: at times he appears with a great body filling the whole of space; at times he appears with a small body of sixteen feet or of eight.”

The great body and the small body are both his appearing, and both fall under those four words, the spiritual power that is as he wills. Then a verdict is added: “The forms in which he appears are all of the colour of true gold.”

Great and small may differ; the colour does not change. The manifested Buddhas within the circular radiance, and the jeweled lotus flowers, are also the same as what was said before.

The commentators of old point out here that this one sentence about the colour of true gold is precisely where right and wrong are settled in this contemplation. If the image contemplated is not of the colour of true gold, then it is not an object this contemplation allows — however great or however small it may have appeared.

This way of judging runs along the same line as the first contemplation. The first contemplation judged right from wrong not by how high or low what was seen was, but only by whether what was imaged and what appeared were the same. This contemplation judges true from false not by the size of the body, but only by the colour. Neither criterion lies in quantity. Both lie in whether the two things fit.

And after speaking of the two bodies, great and small, the sūtra adds one more sentence pointing back: “the manifested Buddhas within the circular radiance, and the jeweled lotus flowers, are as was said above” — that shrunken image is no different in its light and marks from the true body described before. The measure of the body may follow the capacity; the light and its marks do not.

Two Senses of “as He Wills”

Before speaking of the two bodies, the sūtra gives a general reason: “Amitābha Buddha, in the spiritual power that is as he wills, manifesting freely in the lands of the ten directions.”

The readings handed down open those words, as he wills, into two.

One is according with the will of sentient beings: following what they think in their minds, he answers what they need and delivers them. As large as you can hold in your mind, so large does he appear.

The other is according with Amitābha’s own will: the five eyes illumine in full, the six supernormal powers are unhindered, and he observes which capacity may be delivered, so that in a single thought, with nothing before and nothing after, body and mind go to it together.

Taken together, the two say one and the same thing: the size of the body in which he appears is not a limit upon the Buddha; it is the measure of the capacity. And of these two, the first is set up for you, while the second is his own affair.

Recognizing Them by One Thing on the Head

This contemplation also has one very practical instruction.

“The Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta, in every place, have bodies the same as those of sentient beings.”

The bodies these two show in every place are the same as those of sentient beings. Then how is one to recognize them?

“One need only contemplate the mark upon the head to know that this one is Avalokiteśvara and that one is Mahāsthāmaprāpta.”

One looks only at the head. The tenth contemplation said that within Avalokiteśvara’s heavenly crown there is a standing manifested Buddha; the eleventh said that upon Mahāsthāmaprāpta’s fleshy protuberance there is a jeweled vase. To recognize a person one need not look at the whole body; that one thing is enough.

And the sūtra goes on to say why they are here: “These two bodhisattvas assist Amitābha Buddha and universally convert and deliver all sentient beings.”

The Good Done in Concentration Closes Here

“This is called the contemplation of mixed images, and it is named the thirteenth contemplation.”

From the setting sun of the first contemplation to the image sixteen feet high of this one, the thirteen contemplations are walked through. What Vaidehī had asked for at the outset was teach me reflection, teach me right reception; these thirteen contemplations are the answer to those two sentences.

What the sūtra will speak of next is no longer the object contemplated on the seat, but what nine kinds of person meet with at the end of life.

Looking back over the sequence of these thirteen, one finds that it does not run upward all the way. The first six, from the sun, the water, the ground, the trees, and the pool to the pavilions, are the surface of that land; the seventh sets up the Flower Throne, the eighth the image, the ninth sees the Buddha’s true body, the tenth and eleventh the two great beings — that much runs upward. The twelfth puts the person inside, and the thirteenth draws the Buddha back to sixteen feet — and that runs downward and back.

A sūtra that teaches contemplation does not, where its contemplation section ends, climb to a summit; it turns around and sets the door lower.

And over that low door the same sentence is still written: the forms in which he appears are all of the colour of true gold. So this is not a Buddha at a discount; it is the same Buddha, appearing at a size that can be caught.

The good done in concentration, at its last step, does not arrive at a higher object; it walks back to a smaller image — and upon that smaller image the same sentence is written: the forms in which he appears are all of the colour of true gold.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Image Sixteen Feet High

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same image sixteen feet high upon the water of the pool, looked at in two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary in Four Fascicles. He opens this contemplation into eleven segments and marks the beginning and end of each sentence. He explains why the contemplation of a small image is taught: “this is the Tathāgata teaching sentient beings to change the object and turn the mind, and so enter contemplation”; and he lists the places where the image may be formed — upon the flowers on the water of the pool, in the jeweled palaces and pavilions, beneath the jeweled groves and trees, within the jeweled terraces and halls, and inside the jeweled clouds and flower canopies of open space — “in places such as these, settling the mind on each in turn and forming the image of it, one forms in every case the image of a manifested Buddha, so that capacity and object may match each other and accomplishment may come easily.” He explains what accomplishment rests upon: “it is simply that Amitābha’s vow is weighty, and so all who form the image succeed.” As for what distinguishes the two bodhisattvas, he reads the character as head, and so takes as the distinction the standing manifested Buddha upon Avalokiteśvara’s head and the jeweled vase upon Mahāsthāmaprāpta’s head. He also states the matching of principal and companions in one line: “when the Buddha is great the attendants too are great; when the Buddha is small the attendants too are small.” This contemplation once finished, he gathers the whole up: from the contemplation of the sun to the contemplation of the Flower Throne is the dependent recompense, from the contemplation of the image to the contemplation of mixed images is the direct recompense, and here the meaning of the one gate of the good done in concentration is complete.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He divides very sparely, making only two segments, and what concerns him is the doubt in people’s minds: having heard before of the vast and measureless, and hearing now of contemplating the small, will they not doubt that this is the Buddha’s body, and so be irreverent toward the small image? His answer is that “whether what is contemplated be great or small, it is in every case the Buddha’s body; this sweeps away the doubts of the assembly and gives rise in people to a weighty regard”; what this contemplation does is precisely to sweep that doubt away. As for what distinguishes the two bodhisattvas, what he reads is the mark upon the hand, and so he speaks of their hands being soft, having eighty-four thousand lines, and receiving and drawing in sentient beings with these jeweled hands; and he also records alongside it the account of those who take it as the head, closing with the judgment “both alike are the text of the sūtra, and there is no harm in using either.”

One line reads it as the gate of practice lowering a step to meet the capacity; the other reads it as the gate of doctrine sweeping away doubt to give rise to reverence.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: the forms in which he appears are all of the colour of true gold.

上輩生想14 Contemplation of Birth in the Highest Grade

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

前十三觀所觀的都是境:日、水、地、樹、池、樓、座、像、佛身、觀音、勢至、自身、丈六像。第十四觀起,所觀的換成了人——九種將要生到那個國土去的人,以及他們臨終那一刻所遇見的事。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把三輩九品判作散善,並先立十一門作為通式,一品一品逐門對過去,說這樣就成一百番義;他又把上品三位分別定為「大乘上善凡夫」「大乘次善凡夫」「大乘下善凡夫」。智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》則把三品各配一個位次,說上品當道種、中品當性種、下品當習種。九品之人究竟是凡是聖,兩家所判判然不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

先說心,不先說行

經文開口第一句是總標:「凡生西方有九品人。」

接著就進上品上生。而上品上生的第一個條件,不是誦了多少經、持了多少戒:

「若有眾生願生彼國者,發三種心,即便往生。何等為三?一者、至誠心。二者、深心。三者、迴向發願心。」

三種心。而且經下了一句很硬的斷語:「具三心者必生彼國。」

「必」字在這部經裡不常出現。經沒有說『或得往生』,說的是必生。

至誠心:不許外面好看

三心之首是至誠心。至者真,誠者實——古來的解法把這兩個字拆開來講,說的是同一件事:真實。

而真實的反面說得極重。歷來的讀法把它叫做「雜毒之善」:外面現出賢善精進的樣子,裡面懷著虛假;縱使苦勵身心,日夜十二時急走急作,像火燒著頭髮那樣拼命,仍舊只是雜毒之善、虛假之行。要拿這樣的行迴向求生那個國土,說是必不可。

這個判準嚴到讓人不安。你若照著它回頭看自己所做的功課,大概找不出幾件是全然乾淨的。

但它的理由不在人這一邊,在佛那一邊:彼佛因中行菩薩行的時候,乃至一念一剎那,三業所修都是真實心中所作。所迴向的地方既是那樣造出來的,所迴向的行就不能是另一種東西。

這一條不是拿來篩人的,是拿來對準方向的。

深心:兩重決定

三心之次是深心。古來的讀法只給它一個定義:深心就是深信之心。而深信有兩重——

第一重,決定深信自己現在是罪惡生死凡夫,曠劫以來常沒常流轉,沒有出離的因緣。

第二重,決定深信彼佛四十八願攝受眾生,無疑無慮,乘那個願力必定得生。

這兩重是同一個「決定」的兩面。前一重把自己看到底,後一重把佛願信到底。古來的讀法把二者並作一個深心的兩種,不分成兩心——兩重同時決定,才叫深。

迴向發願心:不被人說動

三心之三是迴向發願心。過去以及今生身口意所修的一切世間與出世間的善根,以及隨喜他人所修的一切善根,全都以真實深信之心迴向,願生那個國土。

古來注家在此處加了一句:這個心的深信像金剛一樣,不被一切異見異學、別解別行的人所動亂破壞。

換句話說,這一心的考驗不在自己懈怠的時候,在別人開口的時候。

我們大概都認得那種鬆動:一件事本來已經定了,聽人說了一句『那樣不行吧』,心就晃了。古來注家把這句提醒放在迴向發願心底下,不是偶然——迴向是一個要一路走到底的動作,中途回顧一次,就落了道。

兩組三,不是一組

三心說完,經又說了一次「三」:

「復有三種眾生,當得往生。何等為三?一者、慈心不殺,具諸戒行。二者、讀誦大乘方等經典。三者、修行六念,迴向發願生彼佛國。」

這一組三是行,不是心。而三者之間是並列,不是遞進:一個人持戒修慈而不誦經,也算;一個人專誦大乘而不長於持戒,也算;一個人只修六念——念佛、念法、念僧、念戒、念捨、念天——把它迴向,也算。

古來的讀法在此說得明白:眾生性習不同,執法各異;戒能持五乘三佛之機,法能薰成三賢十地之慧,若以德用來比校,各有一能。

經沒有要求一個人樣樣都有。它只要求那一樣是真的,而且是迴向的。

我們讀到三心那一段時容易繃緊,讀到這一段就該鬆下來:三心說的是心的方向,這三種眾生說的是手上有什麼。方向只有一個,手上的東西各人不同。

一日乃至七日

然後是時間:「具此功德,一日乃至七日,即得往生。」

上品上生所需要的時間,經給的是一日到七日。

歷來的讀法把這句拆成上下兩端:上盡一形,下至一日、一時、一念。而其大意是「一發心已後誓畢此生,無有退轉,唯以淨土為期」——不是七天做完就算了,是從發心那一刻起,這一生就朝著那個方向。

三種臺

上品三位的差別,經寫在他們臨終所坐的那個臺上。

上品上生坐的是金剛臺,來迎的是阿彌陀佛與無數化佛;上品中生坐的是紫金臺,來迎的是佛與千尊化佛;上品下生坐的是金蓮華,來迎的是五百尊化佛。

到了那邊,華開的遲疾也是三等:金剛臺無所謂開合,逕自到彼;紫金臺「經宿即開」;金蓮華要一日一夜才開,而且開了以後七天才得見佛,見了佛還「於眾相好心不明了」,要到三個七日之後才看得清楚。

古來的讀法把這個差別歸到一處:由行強故上上得金剛臺,由行劣故上中得紫金臺。

差別不在佛那裡,在行這裡。同一位佛來迎,來的樣子隨著行而不同;同一個國土去到,見得清楚與否隨著行而不同。而三位都往生了——這是經在說差別的同時,一直沒有動搖的那一點。

一件容易讀漏的小事

上品中生那一段裡有一句:「經於七日,應時即於阿耨多羅三藐三菩提,得不退轉。」

七日。這個七日算在哪一邊?

古來注家在此設了一辨:這裡說的七日,恐怕是此間的七日,不是彼國的七日;此間經過七天,在那邊只是一念須臾之間。

這一辨不改經文一個字,只是提醒讀的人:兩邊的時間不是同一把尺。

同樣的分寸也用在別處。上品下生要「三七日後乃了了見」,中間那二十一天在此界是三個星期,在彼處是什麼長度,經沒有說,注家也沒有代它說。經給了數目,沒有給換算。

承衍——兩副眼看同一批上輩人

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一批乘臺往生的人,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他在玄義分裡先與諸師辯過一場:有人判上品上生是四地至七地已來的菩薩,他反問——四地七地菩薩的功用不可思議,豈用得著一日七日之善、華臺授手來迎接?他的結論是:「又看此《觀經》定善,及三輩上下文意,總是佛去世後,五濁凡夫,但以遇緣有異,致令九品差別。」上品三人是遇大凡夫,中品三人是遇小凡夫,下品三人是遇惡凡夫;九品所分的不是位次,是所遇之緣。他並舉出十處經文為證,斷云「證明如來說此十六觀法但為常沒眾生,不干大小聖也」。

三心之中,他於深心用力最深:由深信開出就人立信與就行立信兩門,於就行立信中分正行與雜行,於正行之中又分正定之業與助業——「一者一心專念彌陀名號,行住坐臥不問時節久近念念不捨者,是名正定之業,順彼佛願故。」而為守護此信,他在迴向發願心之下自立了一個譬:一個人向西行百千里,中路見二河,火河在南,水河在北,中間有一條四五寸寬的白道;東岸有人勸他「但決定尋此道行,必無死難」,西岸有人喚他「汝一心正念直來,我能護汝」,身後群賊惡獸喚他回頭。他解此譬曰:水喻貪愛,火喻瞋憎,四五寸的白道喻眾生貪瞋煩惱之中能生的那一點清淨願往生心。此譬經文所無,是疏家自立以防外邪異見之難。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他先說此下三觀所觀的是往生之人,其用有二:一為令人識三品之別而捨中下修上品,二為令人識位次之上中下。他把三品配位:上品之人始從習種終至解行菩薩,中品從外凡十信已下,下品即是今時悠悠凡夫。三心他釋得簡:至者言專,誠者言實;深者佛果深高,以心往求,故云深心,並引《十地經》「入深廣心」、《涅槃經》「根深難拔故言深心」為據。六念他列作佛、法、僧、施、戒、天,與善導所列之「捨」異其一目。三臺之別他也記:「一、得道有遲疾;二、所乘有異。初則金剛臺,中紫金臺,下金蓮華。」

一路把九品讀成凡夫遇緣之異,一路把九品讀成位次高下之階。

而經自己只說了一句:具三心者必生彼國。

What the first thirteen contemplations contemplated were all objects: the sun, the water, the ground, the trees, the pool, the towers, the throne, the image, the Buddha’s body, Avalokiteśvara, Mahāsthāmaprāpta, oneself, and the image sixteen feet high. From the fourteenth contemplation on, what is contemplated changes to persons — the nine kinds of person who are to be born in that land, and what they meet at the moment their life ends.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles judges the three grades and the nine grades of birth to be the good done in a scattered mind, and first sets up eleven articles as a common form, matching each grade against each article in turn, and saying that in this way a hundred rounds of meaning are made; he further fixes the three positions of the highest grade severally as “the ordinary person of the highest good in the Great Vehicle,” “the ordinary person of the next good in the Great Vehicle,” and “the ordinary person of the lower good in the Great Vehicle.” Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life instead assigns each of the three grades a position in the stages, saying that the highest grade answers to the seed of the path, the middle grade to the seed of the nature, and the lowest grade to the seed of practice. Whether the persons of the nine grades are ordinary or holy, the two houses judge plainly differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

The Mind Is Spoken of First, Not the Practice

The sūtra opens with a general marking: “Of all who are born in the West there are persons of nine grades.”

Then it goes straight into the highest birth of the highest grade. And the first condition of the highest birth of the highest grade is not how many scriptures have been recited or how many precepts have been kept:

“If there are sentient beings who wish to be born in that land, they give rise to three kinds of mind and are born there at once. What are the three? The first is the mind of utmost sincerity; the second is the profound mind; the third is the mind that dedicates and directs and makes the vow.”

Three kinds of mind. And the sūtra lays down a very hard judgment upon them: “One who is complete in these three minds will necessarily be born in that land.”

The word necessarily does not often appear in this sūtra. The sūtra does not say may attain birth there; it says will necessarily be born there.

The Mind of Utmost Sincerity: No Fine Appearance Outside

The first of the three minds is the mind of utmost sincerity. Utmost means true, sincerity means real — the readings handed down take the two words apart and gloss them, and what they say is one and the same thing: true and real.

And the opposite of the true and real is stated in the heaviest terms. The readings of old have called it “good mixed with poison”: outwardly displaying the appearance of the worthy, the good, and the energetic, while harbouring within what is hollow and false. Even should one drive body and mind bitterly on, running hard and working hard through the twelve hours of day and night as though one’s head were burning, it is still only good mixed with poison, a practice that is hollow and false. To take such a practice and dedicate it toward seeking birth in that land is said to be by no means possible.

This criterion is severe enough to be unsettling. If you look back over your own practice by its measure, you will probably not find many pieces of it wholly clean.

But its reason does not lie on the side of the person; it lies on the side of the Buddha. When that Buddha was practising the bodhisattva practice in the causal stage, everything cultivated in the three kinds of karma, down to a single thought and a single instant, was done within a true and real mind. Since the place toward which the dedication is made was made in that way, what is dedicated to it cannot be a thing of another kind.

This article is not there to sift people out; it is there to set the direction straight.

The Profound Mind: Two Decisions

The second of the three minds is the profound mind. The readings of old give it only one definition: the profound mind is the mind of profound trust. And the profound trust has two layers —

The first: to trust profoundly and decisively that one is oneself at present an ordinary person of offence and evil, of birth-and-death, who through vast kalpas has been constantly sinking and constantly drifting, with no condition for going forth.

The second: to trust profoundly and decisively that the forty-eight vows of that Buddha embrace sentient beings, and that, without doubt and without misgiving, one who rides upon the power of those vows will decidedly be born in that land.

These two layers are the two faces of one and the same decision. The first sees oneself through to the bottom; the second trusts the Buddha’s vow to the bottom. The readings of old make the two into two kinds of a single profound mind and do not divide them into two minds — only when both layers are decided at once is it called profound.

The Mind That Dedicates and Directs and Makes the Vow: Not to Be Talked Out of It

The third of the three minds is the mind that dedicates and directs and makes the vow. All the roots of good, worldly and world-transcending, cultivated in body, speech, and mind in the past and in this present life, together with all the roots of good rejoiced in that others have cultivated, are dedicated and directed with a mind of true and real profound trust, with the vow to be born in that land.

The commentators of old add a sentence here: the profound trust of this mind is as it were adamantine, and is not stirred, confounded, or destroyed by any persons of different view or different learning, of divergent understanding or divergent practice.

Which is to say that the testing of this one mind comes not when one is slack oneself, but when someone else opens his mouth.

We probably all recognize that loosening: a thing has already been settled, and then someone says, surely that won’t do — and the mind wavers. That the commentators of old put this warning under the mind that dedicates and directs and makes the vow is no accident: dedicating and directing is an act that has to be carried the whole way, and one backward glance midway loses the road.

Two Sets of Three, Not One

The three minds having been stated, the sūtra says “three” once more:

“There are, further, three kinds of sentient beings who are to attain birth there. What are the three? The first are those who are kindly of mind and do not kill, and who are complete in the various observances of the precepts. The second are those who read and recite the Vaipulya scriptures of the Great Vehicle. The third are those who cultivate the six recollections and dedicate and direct them, vowing to be born in that buddha-land.”

This set of three is practice, not mind. And the three stand side by side, not one above another: a person who keeps the precepts and cultivates kindness but does not recite scriptures counts; a person who is devoted to reciting the Great Vehicle but is not strong at keeping the precepts counts; a person who cultivates only the six recollections — recollection of the Buddha, of the Dharma, of the Saṅgha, of the precepts, of relinquishment, and of the gods — and dedicates them counts.

The readings of old are plain about it here: the natures and habits of sentient beings are not the same and each clings to a different dharma; the precepts can hold the capacities of the five vehicles and the three buddhas, the Dharma can perfume into being the wisdom of the three worthies and the ten grounds, and if one weighs them by their virtue and use, each has its one capacity.

The sūtra does not ask that one person have every one of them. It asks only that the one he has be real, and that it be dedicated.

Reading the passage on the three minds we tend to tighten up; reading this one we should slacken again: the three minds speak of the direction of the mind, and these three kinds of sentient being speak of what one has in hand. There is only one direction; what is in hand differs from person to person.

One Day, or Up to Seven Days

Then comes the time: “Complete in merit such as this, in one day or up to seven days one attains birth in that land.”

For the highest birth of the highest grade, the time the sūtra gives is one day to seven days.

The readings handed down break this sentence into an upper and a lower limit: at the upper limit exhausting a whole lifetime, at the lower reaching to one day, one hour, one thought. And their general intent is that “once the mind is aroused one vows to finish out this life without retrogression, taking the Pure Land alone as one’s term” — not that seven days of doing it is the end of the matter, but that from the moment the mind is aroused this whole life faces that way.

Three Kinds of Terrace

The difference among the three positions of the highest grade the sūtra writes upon the terrace they sit on at the end of life.

The highest birth of the highest grade sits upon the adamantine terrace, and what comes to welcome him is Amitābha Buddha with countless manifested buddhas; the middle birth of the highest grade sits upon the purple-gold terrace, and what comes to welcome him is the Buddha with a thousand manifested buddhas; the lowest birth of the highest grade sits upon a golden lotus flower, and what comes to welcome him is five hundred manifested buddhas.

On arrival there, the speed with which the flower opens is likewise of three ranks: for the adamantine terrace there is no question of closing or opening, and he arrives there straight away; the purple-gold terrace “opens after a single night”; the golden lotus flower takes one day and one night before it opens, and after it has opened it is seven days before he attains the sight of the Buddha, and even having seen the Buddha “his mind is not yet clear about the many marks and signs,” so that only after three sevens of days does he see them clearly.

The readings of old refer this difference to one place: because the practice is strong the highest of the highest obtains the adamantine terrace, and because the practice is inferior the middle of the highest obtains the purple-gold terrace.

The difference is not on the Buddha’s side but on the side of the practice. The same Buddha comes to welcome them, and the manner of his coming differs according to the practice; the same land is arrived at, and whether it is seen clearly differs according to the practice. And all three positions are born there — this is the point the sūtra never lets waver while it is stating the differences.

A Small Thing Easily Read Past

In the passage on the middle birth of the highest grade there is a sentence: “After seven days have passed, at that very time he attains non-retrogression in unsurpassed perfect awakening.”

Seven days. On which side are these seven days counted?

The commentators of old set up a distinction here: the seven days spoken of are likely the seven days of this world, and are not the seven days of that land; what passes here as seven days is, in that place, an instant of a single thought.

This distinction alters not one character of the sūtra; it only reminds the reader that the time on the two sides is not measured by one and the same rule.

The same measure is used elsewhere. The lowest birth of the highest grade must wait until “after three sevens of days does he see them clear and distinct”; those twenty-one days in the middle are three sevens of days in this world, and what length they are in that place the sūtra does not say, nor do the commentators say it in its stead. The sūtra gives the numbers and gives no conversion.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Company of the Highest Grade

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same company of persons mounting the terrace to birth in that land, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. In the Section on the Profound Meaning he has first fought out a round with the other masters: some judge the highest birth of the highest grade to be a bodhisattva from the fourth ground up to the seventh ground, and he asks in return — the functioning of a bodhisattva of the fourth or seventh ground is beyond conceiving; what use would he have for the good of one day or seven days, or for the flower-terrace and the outstretched hand that come to welcome him? His conclusion is: “Again, looking at the good done in concentration in this Contemplation Sūtra, and at the sense of the text above and below concerning the three grades, all are ordinary persons of the five turbidities after the Buddha has passed from the world; it is only because the conditions they meet differ that the nine grades come to be distinguished.” The three persons of the highest grade are ordinary persons who met the Great Vehicle, the three of the middle grade ordinary persons who met the Lesser, the three of the lowest grade ordinary persons who met evil; what the nine grades divide is not rank but the conditions met. He further raises ten passages of the sūtra as witnesses and judges: “This proves that the Tathāgata taught these sixteen methods of contemplation only for the sentient beings who are constantly sinking, and that they have nothing to do with the sages, great or small.”

Among the three minds it is upon the profound mind that he puts out most strength: from profound trust he opens two gates, establishing trust with respect to the person and establishing trust with respect to the practice; within establishing trust with respect to the practice he divides right practice from mixed practice; and within right practice he further divides the act that rightly settles birth from the auxiliary act — “The first, single-mindedly and exclusively to recollect the name of Amitābha, walking, standing, sitting, or lying down, asking nothing of whether the season and time be long or short, and not letting go of it from thought to thought — this is called the act that rightly settles birth, because it accords with that Buddha’s vow.” And to guard this trust he sets up, under the mind that dedicates and directs and makes the vow, a simile of his own: a man travels westward a hundred thousand leagues and midway sees two rivers, a river of fire to the south and a river of water to the north, with a white path four or five inches wide between them; on the eastern bank someone urges him, “only travel this path with decision, and there will surely be no peril of death,” and on the western bank someone calls him, “come straight on with one mind and right mindfulness, and I can protect you,” while behind him a band of robbers and evil beasts call him back. He glosses the simile thus: the water figures craving and affection, the fire figures anger and hatred, and the white path four or five inches wide figures that one point of pure mind, vowing for birth in that land, which can arise amid the afflictions of craving and anger in sentient beings. The sūtra has nothing of this simile; the commentator set it up himself, to ward off the trouble of outward crookedness and divergent views.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He says first that what the three contemplations below this contemplate is the persons who are born in that land, and that this has two uses: one, to make people know the differences among the three grades and so put aside the middle and the lowest and cultivate the highest; two, to make people know the highest, middle, and lowest of position. He assigns the three grades their positions: the persons of the highest grade begin from the seed of practice and end at the bodhisattva of understanding and practice; those of the middle grade are from the ten faiths of the outer ordinary and below; the lowest grade is precisely the drifting ordinary person of the present time. The three minds he glosses briefly: utmost speaks of the exclusive and sincerity speaks of the real; profound means that the buddha-fruit is profound and high and one seeks toward it with the mind, and therefore it is called the profound mind — and he cites the Sūtra of the Ten Grounds on “entering the mind that is deep and broad” and the Nirvāṇa Sūtra on “the root being deep and hard to pull up, therefore it is called the profound mind” as his warrant. The six recollections he lists as the Buddha, the Dharma, the Saṅgha, giving, the precepts, and the gods, differing in one item from Shandao’s “relinquishment.” The difference among the three terraces he also records: “First, in attaining the path there is slowness and speed; second, what is mounted differs. The first is the adamantine terrace, the middle the purple-gold terrace, the lowest the golden lotus flower.”

One line reads the nine grades as ordinary persons differing in the conditions they met; the other reads the nine grades as a stair of higher and lower rank.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: one who is complete in these three minds will necessarily be born in that land.

中輩生想15 Contemplation of Birth in the Middle Grade

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

上輩三位講的是發三種心、讀誦大乘、修行六念的人。到中輩,經所說的人換了一批:他們所憑的不是心,是戒。而中輩的最後一位,連戒也沒有——他一生只做了一件事:孝養父母,行世仁義。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把中輩三位分別定為「小乘根性上善凡夫」「小乘下善凡夫」「世善上福凡夫」,一路往下;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》則把中品配在性種之位,並就中輩得阿羅漢一事,與《往生論》「二乘不得生」之說作了一番會通。兩家所判不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

這一輩所憑的是戒

中品上生的因,經列得很具體:

「若有眾生受持五戒,持八戒齋,修行諸戒,不造五逆,無眾過惡」。

沒有一句是關於觀想的,也沒有一句是關於誦經的。全是戒。

而戒之後緊接一句:「以此善根,迴向願求生於西方極樂世界。」

持戒是因,迴向是門。歷來的讀法在此把中輩所修繫在三福的第二福——戒善——上面:受戒有具受、不具受,持戒有具持、不具持,而「但能迴向盡得往生」。

戒本身不會把人送到那個國土去;把它轉個方向,才會。

這一點在三輩之中是一貫的。上輩所修的是心與大乘之行,中輩所修的是戒,下輩什麼都沒有——而三輩的文字裡都有同一個動作:迴向。所修的東西可以差得很遠,那個轉身的動作是同一個。

一日一夜也算

中品中生的條件,短得讓人意外:

「若一日一夜持八戒齋,若一日一夜持沙彌戒,若一日一夜持具足戒,威儀無缺。」

三個「若」字並列,任取其一。而每一個前面都只有一個時間單位:一日一夜。

不是終身持戒,不是幾十年不犯。就一天一夜。

古來注家在此加了一句分寸:修戒的時候,或是終身,或一年一月一日一夜一時,時間本來就不定,大意都以畢命為期,只是不得毀犯。而這一日一夜之中,要「清淨無犯,乃至輕罪,如犯極重之過」——把最輕的過失當作最重的來守。

時間可以短到一日一夜,而在那一日一夜裡,標準沒有降。

你若把這一句和上輩的「一日乃至七日」放在一起看,會看見這部經對時間的一貫態度:它從不要求長,只要求那一段是實的。

來迎的隊伍不一樣

讀三輩九品,有一處極易讀過去:來迎的人不是每一品都相同。

上輩來的是阿彌陀佛與觀世音、大勢至,加上無數化佛與百千比丘。到中品上生,經文寫的是:

「阿彌陀佛與諸比丘,眷屬圍繞,放金色光至其人所」。

只有比丘眾,沒有提菩薩。

古來的讀法就此點明:這是由小乘根性還感小根之眾。

所感之眾隨所修之行而異——這一句不是在分高下,是在說一件很樸素的事:一個人一生所親近的是什麼,臨終所現前的就是什麼。

你若把上輩、中輩、下輩三段的來迎場面並排讀一次,會看見經在這件事上寫得很細。每一輩底下各有三品,來迎的場面逐品不同;單取每一輩最上的那一品為例:上品上生是佛與二大士、無數化佛以至百千比丘聲聞諸天,中品上生是佛與諸比丘眷屬圍繞,下品上生是化佛與化觀世音、化大勢至。同一位佛,三種現法。

而佛為他所說的法,也正是他所熟的那一套:「演說苦、空、無常、無我,讚歎出家得離眾苦。」

古來注家在「讚歎出家」四字上停了一停,說得極其具體:種種俗緣、家業、王官、長征遠防,出了家就仰於四輩,萬事不憂,逈然自在,去住無障,因此得以修道——所以說是離眾苦。

最下的那一位

中品下生一段,是三輩九品裡最特別的一段。

「若有善男子、善女人,孝養父母,行世仁義」。

沒有戒,沒有經,沒有觀,也沒有求往生的念頭。這個人一生所做的,只是好好待父母,行世間的仁義。

古來的讀法在此說得很清楚:這一品的人不曾見聞佛法,也不懂得希求出離,只是自行孝養而已。

那他怎麼去的?

「此人命欲終時,遇善知識為其廣說阿彌陀佛國土樂事,亦說法藏比丘四十八大願。」

臨終那一刻,才第一次聽見這件事。

「聞此事已,尋即命終。譬如壯士屈伸臂頃,即生西方極樂世界。」

聽完就走了。而從此界到彼國,經給的長度是一位壯士屈伸手臂那麼久。

一生沒有聽過的法,在最後一刻聽見了一次;而經說,這一次就夠。

到了之後還要走的路

經並沒有把中輩的果說得很高。

中品上生「應時即得阿羅漢道,三明、六通、具八解脫」;中品中生「聞法歡喜,得須陀洹,經半劫已成阿羅漢」;中品下生要「過一小劫,成阿羅漢」。

三位所得的都是小果,而快慢是三等:一個是應時就得,一個要半劫,一個要一小劫。

生後的遲疾也是三等。中品上生「蓮花尋開」——隨即就開;中品中生要「經於七日蓮花乃敷」;中品下生則是生到那裡「經七日」才遇見二位大士。前二等說的是華開的遲疾,第三等經只說了遇見二位大士的時節,沒有說華開。古來注家把中上華開之速歸在一處:這是由戒行精強的緣故。

經文在中品中生那一段還用了四個很好的字:「戒香薰修」。戒不是一條一條記在紙上的規矩,是一種薰出來的氣味——薰久了,人整個是那個味道,臨終所感的也是那個味道。

往生不是終點。它把一個人放到一個能繼續走下去的地方,而不是一步到底。

我們讀三輩九品,容易把注意力放在『去不去得成』上;而經在每一品的末尾都還接著寫了一段生後之事——見佛、聞法、得果、發心。去到只是那一段的開頭。

兩個很小的動作

這一段裡有兩個譬,都取自身體最小的動作。

一個在中品上生:那人自見己身坐蓮花臺,長跪合掌為佛作禮,而「未舉頭頃即得往生極樂世界」。頭還沒抬起來就到了。古來注家把這一句說得很妙:低頭在此,舉頭已在彼國。

另一個在中品下生:「譬如壯士屈伸臂頃」。

經自己說的是「阿彌陀佛去此不遠」;一部經費了那麼多文字寫六十萬億那由他恒河沙由旬的佛身,而寫從這裡到那裡所需的時間,用的卻是低一次頭、伸一次手臂。

承衍——兩副眼看同一批中輩人

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一批持戒與孝養之人,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他於中輩仍用上輩所立的十一門為通式,一位一位對過去。三位之定位他寫得極整齊:中上是「小乘根性上善凡夫人」,中中是「小乘下善凡夫人」,中下是「世善上福凡夫人」。他釋來迎之眾曰「二明彌陀與比丘眾來,無有菩薩,由是小乘根性還感小根之眾也」;釋華開之速曰「一明寶華尋發,此由戒行精強故也」;釋「未舉頭頃」曰「六明行者低頭在此,舉頭已在彼國也」。中品下生之人,他斷得很直白:「四正明此品之人不曾見聞佛法,亦不解悕求,但自行孝養也。」本輩既竟,他以八句之讚收之,其首句是「中輩中行中根人,一日齋戒處金蓮」。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他於本輩最用力處不在行門,在會通:《往生論》說二乘不得生,而此經中輩明明是小乘得生,二者如何並立?他的答是——「正處小行不生,要由垂終發大乘種,爾乃得生。經說現今,論舉本始。」經所說的是現今這一刻,論所舉的是本來的根性。他又問:中品應時即得羅漢,何以不及九品之上?答曰這是退菩提的聲聞往生彼國,無漏道熟便證小果,而不守小位,還起大心,進行彌速,或五劫或十劫得成初地。至於名相,他逐一出目:五戒是不殺、盜、婬、妄語、飲酒;四諦是苦、集、滅、道;須陀洹翻作修習無漏,或逆流。

一路把中輩讀成戒行與所感之眾的相稱,一路把中輩讀成經論之間的一道會通。

而經自己只說了一句:譬如壯士屈伸臂頃,即生西方極樂世界。

The three positions of the highest grade spoke of persons who give rise to three kinds of mind, who read and recite the Great Vehicle, who cultivate the six recollections. At the middle grade the persons the sūtra speaks of change to another company: what they rely on is not mind but the precepts. And the last of the three positions of the middle grade has not even the precepts — in a whole lifetime he did one thing only: he was filial and cared for his father and mother, and practised the humaneness and rightness of the world.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles fixes the three positions of the middle grade severally as “the ordinary person of the highest good whose faculties are of the Lesser Vehicle,” “the ordinary person of the lower good of the Lesser Vehicle,” and “the ordinary person of the higher merit of worldly good,” one below another. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life instead assigns the middle grade to the position of the seed of the nature, and, on the matter of the middle grade’s attaining arhatship, works out a reconciliation with the account in the Treatise on Birth in That Land that those of the two vehicles do not attain birth there. The two houses judge differently, and each keeps its reasons in its own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

What This Grade Relies On Is the Precepts

The cause of the highest birth of the middle grade the sūtra sets out very concretely:

“If there are sentient beings who receive and hold the five precepts, who keep the eight-precept fast, who cultivate the various precepts, who commit none of the five heinous acts and are without faults and evils.”

Not one line about forming images, not one line about reciting scriptures. It is all precepts.

And immediately after the precepts comes one sentence: “With roots of good such as these they dedicate and direct them, vowing to seek birth in the world of Ultimate Bliss in the West.”

Keeping the precepts is the cause; dedicating and directing is the gate. The readings handed down bind what the middle grade cultivates to the second of the three kinds of merit — the good of the precepts: there is receiving in full and receiving in part, there is keeping in full and keeping in part, and yet “if only they can dedicate and direct, all attain birth in that land.”

The precepts by themselves will not carry a person to that land; turned in a direction, they will.

This point runs through the three grades alike. What the highest grade cultivates is mind and the practice of the Great Vehicle; what the middle grade cultivates is the precepts; the lowest grade has nothing at all — and in the text of all three grades there is one and the same act: dedicating and directing. What is cultivated may differ very widely; that act of turning round is one and the same.

One Day and One Night Counts Too

The condition for the middle birth of the middle grade is startlingly short:

“If for one day and one night they keep the eight-precept fast, or for one day and one night keep the śrāmaṇera precepts, or for one day and one night keep the full precepts, with no defect in deportment.”

Three ifs side by side; take any one of them. And before each of them stands only one unit of time: one day and one night.

Not a lifetime of keeping the precepts, not decades without transgression. One day and one night.

The commentators of old add a measure here: as to the time of cultivating the precepts, it may be a whole lifetime, or a year, a month, a day and a night, an hour; the time was never fixed, and the general intent in every case takes the end of life as its term — only, they must not be broken. And within that one day and one night one must be “pure and without transgression, so that even a light offence is treated as though one had committed the gravest fault.”

The time may be as short as one day and one night, and within that one day and one night the standard is not lowered.

If you set this sentence beside the highest grade’s “one day or up to seven days,” you will see this sūtra’s constant attitude toward time: it never asks for length; it asks only that that stretch be real.

The Company That Comes to Welcome Is Not the Same

In reading the three grades and nine grades there is one thing very easily read past: the ones who come to welcome are not the same in every grade.

For the highest grade there came Amitābha Buddha with Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta, and countless manifested buddhas and a hundred thousand bhikṣus besides. At the highest birth of the middle grade the sūtra writes:

“Amitābha Buddha, with many bhikṣus and with his retinue surrounding him, sends forth a golden light and comes to that person’s place.”

An assembly of bhikṣus only; no bodhisattvas are mentioned.

The readings of old point it out at once: this is because faculties of the Lesser Vehicle in turn call forth an assembly of lesser faculties.

That the assembly called forth differs according to the practice cultivated — this is not a ranking of high and low but the statement of something very plain: what a person has kept close to all his life is what appears before him at the end of it.

If you read the scenes of welcome in the three passages of the highest, middle, and lowest grade side by side, you will see how finely the sūtra writes this. Under each grade there are three positions, and the scene of welcome differs from position to position; taking only the topmost position of each grade as the example: for the highest birth of the highest grade it is the Buddha with the two great beings, countless manifested buddhas, and on to a hundred thousand bhikṣus, śrāvakas, and gods; for the highest birth of the middle grade it is the Buddha with many bhikṣus and his retinue surrounding him; for the highest birth of the lowest grade it is a manifested buddha with a manifested Avalokiteśvara and a manifested Mahāsthāmaprāpta. One and the same Buddha; three manners of appearing.

And the Dharma the Buddha expounds for him is precisely the set of things he is at home in: “he expounds for him suffering, emptiness, impermanence, and no-self, and praises the going forth from home as the leaving behind of all sufferings.”

The commentators of old pause over the words “praises the going forth from home,” and are extremely concrete about it: the manifold worldly ties, the family estate, service to king and office, long campaigns and distant garrison duty — once he has gone forth he looks to the fourfold assembly, has no anxiety in ten thousand affairs, is wholly at ease, and meets no obstruction in going or staying, and so is able to cultivate the path — and therefore it is said to be the leaving behind of all sufferings.

The Lowest of Them

The passage on the lowest birth of the middle grade is the most singular in the three grades and nine grades.

“If there are good men or good women who are filial and care for father and mother, and who practise the humaneness and rightness of the world.”

No precepts, no scriptures, no contemplation, and not even the thought of seeking birth in that land. All this person did in a lifetime was to treat his parents well and to practise the humaneness and rightness of the world.

The readings of old are very clear here: the person of this grade has never seen or heard the Buddha-Dharma, does not understand how to hope for release, and only practises filial care of himself.

Then how does he go?

“When this person is about to end his life, he meets a good friend who expounds for him at length the joyful things of the land of Amitābha Buddha, and also expounds the forty-eight great vows of the bhikṣu Dharmākara.”

At that one moment at the end of life he hears of the matter for the first time.

“Having heard of this, he straightway ends his life. As in the time a strong man takes to bend and stretch his arm, he is born in the world of Ultimate Bliss in the West.”

He hears it through and is gone. And for the distance from this world to that land the sūtra gives the length of a strong man bending and stretching his arm.

A Dharma unheard in a whole lifetime is heard once at the last moment; and the sūtra says that this once is enough.

The Road Still to Be Walked after Arrival

The sūtra does not set the fruit of the middle grade very high.

The highest birth of the middle grade “at that very time attains the way of the arhat, the three knowledges, the six supernormal powers, and completeness in the eight liberations”; the middle birth of the middle grade, “hearing the Dharma he rejoices, and becomes a stream-enterer; and after half a kalpa has passed he becomes an arhat”; the lowest birth of the middle grade must wait until “after one small kalpa has passed, he becomes an arhat.”

What all three positions obtain is the lesser fruit, and the speed is of three ranks: one attains it at that very time, one must wait half a kalpa, one must wait a small kalpa.

The speed after birth there is likewise of three ranks. For the highest birth of the middle grade “the lotus flower opens straightway” — it opens at once; the middle birth of the middle grade must wait until “after seven days have passed the lotus flower unfolds”; for the lowest birth of the middle grade the sūtra says only that, born there, he waits “seven days” before meeting the two great beings. The first two ranks speak of the speed with which the flower opens; for the third the sūtra gives only the time of meeting the two great beings and says nothing of the flower opening. The commentators of old refer the speed of the flower’s opening for the highest of the middle to one place: it is because the practice of the precepts was pure and strong.

In the passage on the middle birth of the middle grade the sūtra also uses four very fine words: “the fragrance of the precepts perfumes and cultivates.” The precepts are not a set of rules noted down one by one on paper; they are a scent perfumed into a person — perfume him long enough and the whole man is that scent, and what he calls forth at the end of life is that scent too.

Birth in that land is not the end of the road. It sets a person down in a place where he can go on walking, rather than carrying him the whole way in one step.

In reading the three grades and nine grades we easily put all our attention on whether the going succeeds; and yet at the end of every grade the sūtra goes on to write a stretch about what happens after birth there — seeing the Buddha, hearing the Dharma, obtaining the fruit, arousing the mind. The arriving is only the beginning of that stretch.

Two Very Small Movements

There are two similes in this passage, and both are taken from the smallest movements of the body.

One is in the highest birth of the middle grade: the man sees his own body seated upon a lotus-flower terrace, kneeling upright with palms joined and doing homage to the Buddha, and “in the very instant before he has raised his head, he attains birth in the world of Ultimate Bliss.” Before his head has come up he has arrived. The commentators of old put it beautifully: he lowers his head here, and raising his head is already in that land.

The other is in the lowest birth of the middle grade: “as in the time a strong man takes to bend and stretch his arm.”

The sūtra says of itself, “Amitābha Buddha is not far from here”; and a sūtra that spends so many words on a buddha-body of six hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of yojanas, as many as the sands of the Gaṅgā, uses for the time needed to go from here to there a single lowering of the head and a single stretching of the arm.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Company of the Middle Grade

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same company of persons keeping precepts and caring for parents, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. For the middle grade he still uses the eleven articles set up for the highest grade as his common form, matching one position after another against them. The fixing of the three positions he writes with perfect evenness: the highest of the middle is “the ordinary person of the highest good whose faculties are of the Lesser Vehicle,” the middle of the middle “the ordinary person of the lower good of the Lesser Vehicle,” the lowest of the middle “the ordinary person of the higher merit of worldly good.” Of the assembly that comes to welcome he says, “the second clarifies that Amitābha comes with an assembly of bhikṣus and there are no bodhisattvas, because faculties of the Lesser Vehicle in turn call forth an assembly of lesser faculties”; of the speed of the flower’s opening, “the first clarifies that the jeweled flower opens straightway, and this is because the practice of the precepts was pure and strong”; of “in the very instant before he has raised his head,” “the sixth clarifies that the practitioner lowers his head here and, raising his head, is already in that land.” Of the person of the lowest birth of the middle grade he judges very bluntly: “The fourth directly clarifies that the person of this grade has never seen or heard the Buddha-Dharma, and does not understand how to hope for or seek it; he only practises filial care of himself.” This grade once finished, he gathers it up in a praise of eight lines, whose first line is: “Persons of the middle grade, middle practice, middle faculties, / by a single day of fasting and precepts are set upon the golden lotus.”

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. Where he puts out most strength within this grade is not on the gate of practice but on reconciliation: the Treatise on Birth in That Land says that those of the two vehicles do not attain birth there, while in this sūtra the middle grade is plainly of the Lesser Vehicle and does attain birth there — how can the two stand together? His answer is: “One squarely settled in the lesser practice is not born there; it is only because at the point of death the seed of the Great Vehicle is aroused that birth there is attained. The sūtra speaks of the present moment; the treatise raises the original beginning.” What the sūtra speaks of is this present moment; what the treatise raises is the original faculty. He asks further: if the middle grade attains arhatship at that very time, why is it not inferior to the upper of the nine grades? And answers that these are śrāvakas fallen back from awakening who are born in that land; their outflow-free path ripening they realize the lesser fruit, yet they do not hold to the lesser position but go back and forth and arouse the great mind, and their advance is all the swifter, so that in five kalpas or in ten they attain the first ground. As for the terms, he puts out the items one by one: the five precepts are not to kill, not to steal, not to engage in sexual conduct, not to speak falsely, not to drink liquor; the four truths are suffering, its arising, its cessation, and the path; the stream-enterer is rendered as cultivating the outflow-free, or as going against the stream.

One line reads the middle grade as the answering of the assembly called forth to the practice of the precepts; the other reads the middle grade as a reconciliation between sūtra and treatise.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: as in the time a strong man takes to bend and stretch his arm, he is born in the world of Ultimate Bliss in the West.

下輩生想16 Contemplation of Birth in the Lowest Grade

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

十六觀的最後一觀,所觀的是三種人:一種造了種種惡業而不謗大乘,一種毀犯五戒八戒具足戒、偷僧祇物、不淨說法,一種具造五逆十惡。

三種人有一個共同點:到臨命終那一刻,經為他們所開的都不是觀——是聞、是念、是稱名。經走到這裡,前十三觀所教的坐法、境相、驗收,一句也用不上了。

善導《觀經四帖疏》把這三位分別定為「造十惡輕罪凡夫」「破戒次罪凡夫」「具造五逆等重罪凡夫」,並為五逆得生一事立了「抑止門」之解;智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》則說下品「即是今時悠悠凡夫」,並以約人、約行二義會通同一個難處。兩家所答判然不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

一路往下讓

讀這一段,最容易看漏的是經自己在做的一連串讓步。

第一次讓步在下品上生。這個人「多造惡法,無有慚愧」,臨終才遇到善知識。善知識所做的,不是教他觀,是「為讚大乘十二部經首題名字」——連經文都來不及讀,只讀題目。而「以聞如是諸經名故,除却千劫極重惡業」。

第二次讓步緊接著。讀了題目還不夠,「智者復教合掌叉手,稱南無阿彌陀佛」。從聞經轉到稱名。

第三次讓步在下品下生,而且退到了底。善知識照樣「為說妙法,教令念佛」,可是——

「彼人苦逼不遑念佛。」

苦逼得連念佛都來不及。這五個字寫的是一個人臨終最真實的狀態:不是不肯念,是疼得念不成。

於是善友再退一步:「汝若不能念彼佛者,應稱歸命無量壽佛。」

注意「念」與「稱」的分別。念是心裡的事,稱是口裡的事。苦到心裡做不了主的時候,經把行門移到了口上——「如是至心令聲不絕,具足十念」。你若在病床邊陪過人,大概明白這一步移得有多要緊:那個時候,能出聲已經是全部了。

從觀,到聞,到念,到稱。每一次退讓,都是把門檻再降低一寸;而降到最後那一寸,仍舊有門。

值得留意的是退讓的方向。它不是把要求換成別的更容易的要求,是把同一件事一層一層剝到最薄的一層:所觀的佛、所聞的名、所念的佛、所稱的名,自始至終是同一位。退的是行門的形式,不是所歸的對象。

那個數字

三品所除的罪,經給了三個數。

下品上生:聞十二部經題名,除卻千劫極重惡業;稱佛名故,除五十億劫生死之罪。

下品中生:聞彌陀十力威德、光明神力與戒定慧解脫解脫知見,「此人聞已,除八十億劫生死之罪」。

下品下生:「如是至心令聲不絕,具足十念,稱南無阿彌陀佛。稱佛名故,於念念中,除八十億劫生死之罪。」

注意末一句多出來的四個字:於念念中。前兩品是一次除多少,這一品是每一念除八十億劫。

罪最重的那一個,所除的最多。這個次序讀起來是反的,而經就是這樣寫的。

若把它當作『罪造得愈多愈划算』,那是讀反了。經所寫的不是一筆買賣,是一次搶救。

古來的讀法在此設過一問:同樣是臨終那一刻,何以聞十二部經只除千劫,稱佛一聲卻除得那樣多?其答不在名號本身有多大力,在能稱的那顆心:造罪之人障重,加上死苦來逼,善人雖說多經,聽的心是散的;散故除罪輕。而佛名只是一個,一個名能把散心收住,又教他正念稱名,心重故除罪多劫。

所以那個數字量的不是名,是心被收住的程度。

你若把這個答案放回下品下生那一段,會看見它正好對上:那個人苦逼得念不成,善友要他出聲稱名——出聲,正是把一顆散到極處的心強收回來的辦法。經在最後一刻所給的,不是一個更高的法,是一個更能抓得住的把手。

華開之前要等多久

經沒有把代價抹掉。

下品上生「經七七日蓮花乃敷」;下品中生「經於六劫,蓮花乃敷」;下品下生「於蓮花中滿十二大劫,蓮花方開」。

七七四十九天、六劫、十二大劫。往生是同一件事,等待卻是三個長度。

而華未開的時候是什麼情形?歷來的讀法列了三件失去的事:不得見佛與諸聖眾,不得聽聞正法,不得歷事供養。除此以外,別無諸苦。

隨即又補一句:雖然在華中多劫不開,總勝過在阿鼻地獄之中長時永劫受諸苦痛。

這句話沒有把等待說成獎賞。它只是把兩邊放在一起量了一次。

我們讀到這裡,容易生一個疑:既然稱一句名就除八十億劫之罪,何以還要在華中關十二大劫?經沒有答這個疑。它只是把兩件事並排寫著:罪除了,華還沒開。兩件事都真,而經不替它們調停。

一個沒有出現的句子

前十五觀的末尾,都有一句正邪之判。十四觀作:作是觀者,名為正觀;若他觀者,名為邪觀。第二觀作:作此觀者,名為正觀;若他觀者,名為邪觀——起頭差一個字。

第十六觀沒有。

經收在「是名下輩生想,名第十六觀」,就停住了。

這一觀所說的人,臨終才遇善知識。經於此輩不出正邪之判——何以如此,經沒有說,注家也沒有說。

承衍——兩副眼看同一個五逆之人

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一個臨終稱名的人,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把下輩之文標作「觀善惡二行」,三位各定其罪:下上是造十惡輕罪之凡夫,下中是破戒次罪之凡夫,下下是具造五逆等重罪之凡夫。他於下品上生化眾來迎處,下了最重的一語:「然望佛願意者,唯勸正念稱名往生義疾。不同雜散之業,如此經及諸部中處處廣歎,勸令稱名,將為要益也。」

至於五逆何以此經得生而彼經不許,他立抑止門:如來恐眾生造此二過,方便說不得往生,「亦不是不攝也」;五逆已作,不可捨令流轉,還發大悲攝取往生,而謗法之罪尚未造,故止言若起謗法即不得生——這是就未造業而說的。已造者若生,華合經多劫;華中所失者三事而已,猶勝阿鼻。

他並在下品上生末的十八字上別立一段:「非但念佛獨得往生,法僧通念,亦得去也。」——經文說的是「得聞佛名、法名及聞僧名,聞三寶名即得往生」,所以他說,能去的不只是念佛這一條,通念法與僧也一樣去得。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。同一個難處,他答以兩義:約人,造罪有上有下——上根者如世王造逆,必有重悔,令罪消薄,容使得生;下根人造逆多無重悔,故不得生。約行,行有定散——觀佛三昧名定,修餘善業為散;散善力微,不能滅除五逆,故大本就此而言不生,此經明觀,故說得生。

十念他釋作「善心相續至於十念」,並說或一念成就即得往生,以念佛除滅罪障故,即以念佛為勝緣。而少時之心何以能勝終身之惡,他引《大論》之責而答:這心雖然只在少時,力卻猛利,如同垂死之人自知不免,諦心決斷,勝過百年的願力——「如人入陣不惜身命,名為健人也。」

一路把它讀成佛願之攝與止的兩面,一路把它讀成人根與行力的兩層。

而經自己只說了一句:稱佛名故,於念念中,除八十億劫生死之罪。

The last of the sixteen contemplations contemplates three kinds of person: one who has made every sort of evil karma and yet does not slander the Great Vehicle; one who has broken and transgressed the five precepts, the eight precepts, and the full precepts, who has stolen the goods of the Saṅgha and taught the Dharma without purity; and one fully possessed of the five heinous acts and the ten evils.

The three have one thing in common: at the very moment when life is ending, what the sūtra opens for them is not a contemplation — it is hearing, it is recollecting, it is uttering the Name. By the time the sūtra reaches this place, the manner of sitting, the objects to be seen, and the tests of accomplishment taught in the first thirteen contemplations are of no use at all, not one sentence of them.

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles fixes the three positions respectively as “the ordinary person who has committed the ten evils, offences of the lighter sort,” “the ordinary person who has broken the precepts, offences of the next sort,” and “the ordinary person fully possessed of the five heinous acts and the like, offences of the grave sort,” and for the birth of those who commit the five heinous acts he sets up his explanation by the gate of restraint. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life says instead that the lowest grade “is the drifting ordinary person of the present time,” and reconciles the same difficulty by the two senses of the person and of the practice. What the two houses answer is plainly not the same, and each keeps his reasons in his own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

Giving Way, One Step at a Time

In reading this passage, what is most easily missed is a whole train of concessions the sūtra is making of itself.

The first concession is in the highest birth of the lowest grade. This man “makes much evil dharma and has no shame or conscience,” and meets a good friend only at the end. What the good friend does is not to teach him a contemplation; it is to praise for him “the title-names at the head of the twelve divisions of the Great Vehicle scriptures” — there is no time even to read the scriptures, only the titles. And “because he has heard the names of these many scriptures, the gravest evil karma of a thousand kalpas is removed.”

The second concession follows at once. Reading the titles is still not enough: “one who is wise then teaches him further to join his palms and fold his hands, and to utter Namo Amitābha Buddha.” From hearing the scriptures the thing turns into uttering the Name.

The third concession is in the lowest birth of the lowest grade, and it retreats all the way to the floor. The good friend still “expounds the wondrous Dharma for him, teaching him to recollect the Buddha” — and yet:

“That person, pressed by pain, has no leisure to recollect the Buddha.”

Pressed by pain until there is no time even to recollect the Buddha. Those few words set down the truest state of a person at the end: it is not that he is unwilling to recollect, but that the pain will not let the recollecting be done.

And so the good companion gives way one step further: “If you cannot recollect that Buddha, you should utter: entrusting my life to the Buddha of Measureless Life.”

Note the difference between recollecting and uttering. Recollecting is a matter of the mind; uttering is a matter of the mouth. When the pain is such that the mind can no longer be master of itself, the sūtra moves the gate of practice to the mouth — “in this way, with a mind of utmost sincerity, he lets the sound go unbroken and is fully possessed of ten thoughts.” If you have ever sat by a sickbed, you probably know how much turns on that shift: at such a time, being able to make a sound is already everything.

From contemplating, to hearing, to recollecting, to uttering. Every giving way lowers the threshold another inch; and at the last inch to which it is lowered, there is still a door.

The direction of the giving way is worth noticing. It does not exchange one requirement for some other, easier requirement; it pares the same one thing down, layer by layer, to its thinnest layer. The Buddha contemplated, the name heard, the Buddha recollected, the Name uttered — from first to last it is one and the same. What gives way is the form of the gate of practice, not the one to whom one turns.

That Number

For the offences removed in the three births, the sūtra gives three figures.

The highest birth of the lowest grade: hearing the title-names of the twelve divisions of scripture removes the gravest evil karma of a thousand kalpas; and because he utters the Buddha’s name, the offences of fifty koṭis of kalpas of birth-and-death are removed.

The middle birth of the lowest grade: he hears the awesome virtue of the ten powers of Amitābha, the light and divine power of that Buddha, and morality, concentration, wisdom, liberation, and the knowledge and vision of liberation — “when this person has heard it, the offences of eighty koṭis of kalpas of birth-and-death are removed.”

The lowest birth of the lowest grade: “In this way, with a mind of utmost sincerity, he lets the sound go unbroken and is fully possessed of ten thoughts, uttering Namo Amitābha Buddha. Because he utters the Buddha’s name, in thought after thought the offences of eighty koṭis of kalpas of birth-and-death are removed.”

Note the four words added at the end: in thought after thought. The first two grades tell how much is removed at one stroke; this grade removes eighty koṭis of kalpas at every single thought.

The one whose offences are heaviest has the most removed. Read straight through, the order runs backwards; and the sūtra has written it exactly so.

To take this as meaning the more offences one makes the better the bargain is to read it upside down. What the sūtra writes is not a piece of trade; it is a rescue.

The readings handed down set a question here: at that same last moment, why does hearing the twelve divisions of the scriptures remove only a thousand kalpas, while a single utterance of the Buddha’s name removes so much more? The answer lies not in how great the power of the Name is in itself, but in the mind that is able to utter it: one who has made offences is heavy with obstruction, and the suffering of death presses upon him besides; though the good person expounds many scriptures, the mind that hears is scattered, and because it is scattered the offences removed are light. But the Buddha’s name is only one, and one name can gather a scattered mind and hold it; he is taught besides to utter the Name in right mindfulness, and because the mind is weighty, many kalpas of offences are removed.

So what that number measures is not the Name; it is the degree to which the mind has been gathered in.

Put that answer back into the passage of the lowest birth of the lowest grade, and you will see it fit exactly: the man is pressed by pain until the recollecting cannot be done, and the good companion has him make a sound and utter the Name — making a sound is precisely the way to force back a mind scattered to its furthest. What the sūtra gives at the last moment is not a higher method; it is a handhold that can better be gripped.

How Long the Wait Before the Flower Opens

The sūtra does not wipe away the cost.

The highest birth of the lowest grade: “when seven sevens of days have passed, the lotus flower then opens.” The middle birth of the lowest grade: “when six kalpas have passed, the lotus flower then opens.” The lowest birth of the lowest grade: “within the lotus flower twelve great kalpas are completed, and the lotus flower then opens.”

Seven sevens of days, forty-nine of them; six kalpas; twelve great kalpas. Birth in that land is one and the same thing, but the waiting comes in three lengths.

And what is the case while the flower has not opened? The readings handed down list three things lost: he cannot see the Buddha and the holy assembly, he cannot hear the right Dharma, he cannot go about serving and making offerings. Apart from these there is no further suffering.

Then a further line is added at once: though he is within the flower for many kalpas and it does not open, this is still better than undergoing every pain within the Avīci hell for long ages and endless kalpas.

That line does not turn the waiting into a reward. It only sets the two sides side by side and measures them once.

Reading this far, one easily raises a doubt: if a single utterance of the Name removes the offences of eighty koṭis of kalpas, why must one still be shut in the flower for twelve great kalpas? The sūtra does not answer that doubt. It merely writes the two things down side by side: the offences are removed; the flower has not yet opened. Both are true, and the sūtra does not reconcile them for us.

A Sentence That Does Not Appear

At the end of each of the first fifteen contemplations there stands a judgment of right and wrong. Fourteen of them read: to make this contemplation is called right contemplation; to make another contemplation is called wrong contemplation. The second contemplation states the same judgment with a different opening character.

The sixteenth contemplation has none.

The sūtra closes at “this is called the image of birth in the lowest grade, and it is named the sixteenth contemplation,” and there it stops.

The people this contemplation speaks of meet a good friend only at the end of life. Here the sūtra gives no judgment of right and wrong for this grade — and why that should be, the sūtra does not say, and the commentators do not say either.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Man Who Committed the Five Heinous Acts

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same man uttering the Name at the end of his life, seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He marks the text of the lowest grade as the contemplation of the two courses of conduct, good and evil, and fixes the offences of each of the three positions: the highest of the lowest is the ordinary person who has committed the ten evils, offences of the lighter sort; the middle of the lowest is the ordinary person who has broken the precepts, offences of the next sort; the lowest of the lowest is the ordinary person fully possessed of the five heinous acts and the like, offences of the grave sort. At the coming to welcome by the manifested ones in the highest birth of the lowest grade he lets fall his weightiest words: “Yet if one looks to the intent of the Buddha’s vow, it only urges the uttering of the Name in right mindfulness, the meaning being that birth in that land comes swiftly thereby. It is not like the acts that are mixed and scattered. So it is that in this sūtra and throughout the various collections it is praised at length everywhere, and the uttering of the Name is urged as the essential benefit.”

As for why those who commit the five heinous acts obtain birth by this sūtra when the other sūtra does not permit it, he sets up the gate of restraint: the Tathāgata, fearing lest sentient beings commit these two faults, said by expedient means that they cannot obtain birth in that land, and yet “it is not that they are not embraced”; the five heinous acts having already been done, they cannot be abandoned and left to turn in transmigration, and great compassion still gathers them in to birth in that land, while the offence of slandering the Dharma has not yet been made, and so it is said, to restrain them, that if slander of the Dharma arises there is no birth — this is spoken in terms of karma not yet made. For one who has made them and is born, the flower stays closed for many kalpas; and what is lost within the flower is three things only, which is still better than the Avīci hell.

He also sets up a separate segment upon the eighteen characters at the end of the highest birth of the lowest grade: “it is not that recollecting the Buddha alone obtains birth in that land: recollecting the Dharma and the Saṅgha as well, one may likewise go.” What the sūtra says there is that he is able to hear the name of the Buddha, the name of the Dharma, and to hear the name of the Saṅgha, and that hearing the names of the Three Jewels he thereby obtains birth in that land; and so, he says, the road that can be gone is not the recollecting of the Buddha alone — recollecting the Dharma and the Saṅgha goes there just as well.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. To the same difficulty he answers with two senses. In terms of the person, those who make offences are of the higher sort and of the lower: one of the higher faculties, as when King Ajātaśatru committed a heinous act, will certainly repent gravely, so that the offence is dissolved and thinned, and he may be allowed to obtain birth; people of the lower faculties who commit heinous acts mostly have no grave repentance, and therefore do not obtain birth. In terms of the practice, practice is of two kinds, concentrated and scattered — the samādhi of contemplating the Buddha is called concentrated, and the cultivation of other good karma is scattered; the power of the good done in a scattered mind is slight and cannot extinguish the five heinous acts, and so the larger sūtra, speaking with reference to this, says there is no birth, while this sūtra clarifies contemplation and therefore says that birth is obtained.

The ten thoughts he glosses as “a good mind continuing in succession up to ten thoughts,” and he says that a single thought accomplished may obtain birth in that land, since recollecting the Buddha extinguishes the obstruction of offences, and so recollecting the Buddha is taken as the superior condition. As for how the mind of so short a time can prevail over a whole life of evil, he answers the challenge raised in the Great Treatise: though this mind lasts but a short time, its force is fierce and keen, like a man on the point of death who knows for certain that he cannot escape, whose mind is fixed and whose resolve is settled, surpassing the power of a hundred years of vows — “it is like a man entering the battle line who does not spare his own life; he is called a stout man.”

One line reads it as the two faces, the gathering in and the restraining, of the Buddha’s vow; the other reads it as the two layers, the faculties of the person and the force of the practice.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: because he utters the Buddha’s name, in thought after thought the offences of eighty koṭis of kalpas of birth-and-death are removed.

得益流通17 Benefits Obtained and Transmission

全文五層 →Full five layers →
義疏Exposition

一部經的末尾,通常會把這部經交代給誰、要人怎麼持。《觀無量壽佛經》講了十六觀——從落日、寶地、寶樹、華座,到佛身、二大士、自身往生想,再到三輩九品——而到了最後付囑的那一句,佛說的是:

「汝好持是語。持是語者,即是持無量壽佛名。」

善導《觀經四帖疏》把全經判為五分(序分、正宗分、得益分、王宮流通分、耆闍分),並在此下了一句:上來雖說定散兩門之益,望佛本願,意在眾生一向專稱彌陀佛名。智顗《觀無量壽佛經疏》則把正說之後分作利益與流通二段,於王宮流通中立列名教持、勸信、付囑、聞喜四事。兩家所歸不同,各自的理由都在自己的書裡。此下所講的是經。

話音才落,就有人得了

經文說完九品,第一件事不是散會,是當場的兌現。

「爾時世尊說是語時,韋提希與五百侍女,聞佛所說,應時即見極樂世界廣長之相,得見佛身及二菩薩。」

應時即見。不是回去修,不是來世成,是說完那一刻就見了。

韋提希「心生歡喜,歎未曾有,豁然大悟,得無生忍」;五百侍女發起無上道心、願生彼國,佛一一為她們授記;連在虛空中聽法的無量諸天,也都發了無上道心。

從序分那個被關在深宮裡、問「我宿何罪,生此惡子」的人,到這一刻豁然大悟——一部經的距離就這麼長。

而古來的讀法還在此加了一筆時間上的分辨:她得無生忍,並不是在此刻才得,是在第七觀初見無量壽佛的時候就已經得了;此處是總牒前文而說其益。經到末了才把帳結出來,事情卻是在中途發生的。

阿難問的是兩件事

得益之後,阿難起身,問了兩件事:

「世尊!當何名此經?此法之要,當云何受持?」

一問名,二問持。而佛的答也正好是兩層。

先答名。這部經有兩個名字:一個叫《觀極樂國土無量壽佛觀世音菩薩大勢至菩薩》,一個叫《淨除業障生諸佛前》。

前一個名,古來的讀法說是「雙標依正」——極樂國土是依報,無量壽佛與二菩薩是正報,一個名把全部十六觀的所觀之境攏在裡面。後一個名不說境,說效:業障淨除,生諸佛前。

一部經的兩個名字,一個從所看的東西取,一個從所去的地方取。

古來注家把前一個名叫做「雙標依正」,並補了一句:能依這部經起行的人,三障之雲自然卷開。名不只是稱呼,也是這部經自己給出的用途說明。

再答持:「汝當受持,無令忘失!」

「何況」二字往上翻

答完之後,佛接著說的是一段比校。

最高的那一層:「行此三昧者,現身得見無量壽佛及二大士。」修成這個三昧的人,這一身就見得到。

而下一句立刻往下降:「若善男子及善女人,但聞佛名、二菩薩名,除無量劫生死之罪」。

只是聽見名字——不是修成三昧,只是聽見——就除無量劫生死之罪。

再一句:「何況憶念!」

聽見尚且如此,何況把它放在心裡念。

這種『以少況多』的句法,第十三觀用過一次——「但想佛像得無量福,況復觀佛具足身相」。兩處同型,而所推的不是同一件事:那一處是從小像推到真身,這一處是從聞名推到憶念。你若把兩句並看,會看見經一直在做同一件事——先把最低的那一級寫下來,再說更高的還在上面。

十六觀那樣長的一部功課,到這裡被放進一個很寬的階梯裡:能作觀的作觀,作不成的聞名,聞了名的再憶念。十六觀講完之後,經把這道階梯一路讓到了聞名;順著它讀下來,沒有人是被關在門外的。

念佛的人,經給了他一個名字

接著是全經對念佛之人最重的一句判語:

「若念佛者,當知此人即是人中芬陀利花」。

芬陀利是華中的名品。古來注家逐一解它的別名:人中好華、希有華、人中上上華、人中妙好華。而他隨即把這幾個名轉到人身上——念佛的人,就是人中好人、人中妙好人、人中上上人、人中希有人、人中最勝人。

然後經給了他兩位同伴:「觀世音菩薩、大勢至菩薩為其勝友」。

前面第十觀、第十一觀費了那麼多文字描寫的兩位大士,在這裡成了念佛之人的朋友。

所付囑的是名

最後,佛單獨叫了一次阿難。

佛告阿難:「汝好持是語。持是語者,即是持無量壽佛名。」

「是語」指的是前面所說的一切。而佛沒有停在『好好記住這些話』,祂多說了一句:持這句話,就是持無量壽佛的名。

一部教觀想的經,末後所付囑的,是一個名字。

兩個會場

經還沒有完。

「爾時世尊,足步虛空,還耆闍崛山。」佛從王宮回到山上——序分裡祂是從耆闍崛山隱沒、在王宮出現的,此刻原路回去。

「爾時,阿難廣為大眾說如上事。」王宮之會,在場的是韋提希、五百侍女、目連與阿難,還有臨空聽法的無量諸天;山上的大眾沒有聽見。於是阿難把上面這些事,為大眾又說了一遍。

我們今天讀得到這部經,靠的正是這一句。

古來的讀法在此還記了一筆:佛何以不逕自散會,而要腳步虛空回到山上?說是為了增益大眾的敬心、也為了奉順自己先前所說。一部在密室裡說的經,最後被帶回公開的會場,於是它才成為可以流通的經。

你今天手上這一部,經過的正是這樣一條路:王宮裡說給一個人聽,山上由一個人轉說給所有人聽。

「無量人、天、龍、神、夜叉,聞佛所說,皆大歡喜,禮佛而退。」

讀到這裡回頭看,「聞佛所說」四個字在這一段裡出現了三次:韋提希與五百侍女聞佛所說而得益,目連阿難韋提希等聞佛所說而歡喜,人天龍神夜叉聞佛所說而歡喜作禮。三次同一語,把王宮的密室與耆闍崛山的公開法會縫在了一處。

古來注家還把末後那個「歡喜」拆出三義:能說法的人清淨——佛的無礙智沒有錯謬;所說的法清淨——能使眾生證得三昧;依法所得的果清淨——依法修行滿足,身證清淨之果。歡喜不是散會時的客套,是三重清淨都到齊了的一個表徵。

承衍——兩副眼看同一句付囑

上來是這一段經文自身的義。此下另以隋唐兩副眼旁照——鏡非經,只是同一句「持是語者,即是持無量壽佛名」,換兩種讀法來看。

善導一路是《觀經四帖疏》的讀法。他把全經判為五分,得益別立一分,是他與他家不同之一處。於王宮流通七句之中,他於第五句「若念佛者」下標出「正顯念佛三昧功能超絕,實非雜善得為比類」,逐一釋分陀利之四名而轉為念佛之人的五個名,並說專念彌陀名者,觀音、勢至常隨影護,亦如親友知識。到第六句,他釋付囑曰「正明付屬彌陀名號,流通於遐代」,隨即下了那句最為後世所繫的話:

「上來雖說定散兩門之益,望佛本願,意在眾生一向專稱彌陀佛名。」

這句話與他在下品上生處所說的「望佛願意者,唯勸正念稱名往生義疾」首尾相應:一在正宗分之末,一在流通分之末。

智顗一路是《觀無量壽佛經疏》的讀法。他把王宮流通開作四事:列名教持、勸人奉信、付囑令持、聞法歡喜。釋經名時他牒作「名觀極樂無量壽佛觀音勢至,亦名淨業生諸佛前」,後文又作「亦名觀無量壽佛,亦名滅除業障」——所牒與今本之字略有出入。他釋「當坐道場」曰:得道之場名曰道場;菩提樹下得道,故名為坐。而「皆大歡喜」四字他也不放過,出了三義:能說之人清淨,所說之法清淨,依法所得之果清淨。至於佛何以要腳步虛空回到耆闍崛山,他說是「為增物敬、奉順其言,故現此變」。

一路把末後一句讀成名號的付囑,一路把末後一段讀成一部經如何被交出去。

而經自己只說了一句:持是語者,即是持無量壽佛名。

At the end of a sūtra there is usually a statement of to whom the sūtra is committed and how people are to hold it. The Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life has taught sixteen contemplations — from the setting sun, the jeweled ground, the jeweled trees, and the flower throne, to the body of the Buddha, the two great beings, and the forming of the image of one’s own birth in that land, and then on to the three grades and the nine grades — and when it comes to that last sentence of entrusting, what the Buddha says is this:

“Hold these words well. One who holds these words holds the name of the Buddha of Measureless Life.”

Shandao’s Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles divides the whole sūtra into five sections (the introduction, the main body, the benefit obtained, the transmission at the palace, and the Gṛdhrakūṭa section), and lets fall a sentence here: although the benefit of the two gates, concentration and scattering, has been spoken of above, if one looks to the Buddha’s original vow, its intent lies in sentient beings uttering the name of Amitābha with single devotion. Zhiyi’s Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life instead divides what follows the direct teaching into the two segments of benefit and transmission, and within the transmission at the palace sets up four matters: setting out the names and teaching him to hold it, urging trust, entrusting, and hearing and rejoicing. The two houses come home to different places, and each keeps his reasons in his own book. What is set out below is the sūtra.

The Words Had Barely Ended, and Someone Had Already Gained It

When the sūtra has finished speaking of the nine grades, the first thing that happens is not the breaking up of the assembly. It is payment on the spot.

“At that time, when the World-Honored One had spoken these words, Vaidehī, together with her five hundred attendant women, heard what the Buddha said, and thereupon saw the vast and far-reaching aspect of the world of Ultimate Bliss, and was able to see the body of the Buddha and the two bodhisattvas.”

Thereupon saw. Not go back and cultivate it, not accomplish it in a life to come: at the very moment the speaking ended, she saw.

Vaidehī “in her mind joy arose and she marveled at what had never been before; all at once she was greatly awakened, and obtained the patience of non-arising.” The five hundred attendant women gave rise to the mind set on the unsurpassed path and vowed to be born in that land, and the Buddha gave a prediction to each of them; and even the measureless gods who had been listening to the Dharma from the air gave rise to the mind set on the unsurpassed path.

From the person shut up in the depths of the palace in the introduction, who asked, “What offence did I commit in the past, that I should give birth to so evil a son?” to this moment of being greatly awakened all at once — that is exactly how long a sūtra is.

And the readings handed down add here a distinction in time: she did not obtain the patience of non-arising at this moment, but had obtained it already at the seventh contemplation, when she first saw the Buddha of Measureless Life; what stands here is a general gathering up of the text before, stating the benefit. The sūtra settles the account only at the end, but the thing itself happened along the way.

Ānanda Asked Two Things

After the benefit, Ānanda rose and asked two things:

“World-Honored One! By what name should this sūtra be called? And the essential of this Dharma — how is it to be received and held?”

One question about the name, one about the holding. And the Buddha’s answer likewise has two layers.

First the name. This sūtra has two names: one is Contemplating the Land of Ultimate Bliss, the Buddha of Measureless Life, the Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara, and the Bodhisattva Mahāsthāmaprāpta; the other is Purifying Away the Obstruction of Karma and Being Born Before All Buddhas.

Of the first name the readings handed down say that it marks both the dependent and the direct — the land of Ultimate Bliss is the dependent recompense, the Buddha of Measureless Life and the two bodhisattvas are the direct recompense; one name gathers into itself the whole field of what is contemplated in the sixteen contemplations. The second name speaks not of the object but of the effect: the obstruction of karma purified away, birth before all buddhas.

Two names for one sūtra: one taken from what is looked at, one from where one goes.

The commentators of old call the first name the marking of both the dependent and the direct, and add a line to it: for one able to rely on this sūtra and raise up practice, the clouds of the three obstructions roll away of themselves. A name is not only a way of being called; it is also this sūtra’s own statement of what it is for.

Then the answer about holding: “You should receive and hold it, and let it not be forgotten or lost!”

The Words “How Much More” Turn Upward

What the Buddha says next is a comparison.

The highest layer: “One who practises this samādhi will in this very body be able to see the Buddha of Measureless Life and the two great beings.” One who accomplishes this samādhi sees them in this very body.

And the next sentence at once comes down: “And if there be a good man or a good woman who merely hears the name of the Buddha and the names of the two bodhisattvas, the offences of measureless kalpas of birth-and-death are removed.”

Merely to hear the names — not to accomplish the samādhi, merely to hear — and the offences of measureless kalpas of birth-and-death are removed.

Then one more sentence: “How much more one who holds them in mind and recollects them!”

If hearing is already so much, how much more to keep them in the mind and recollect them.

This form of argument, from the less to the more, was used once at the thirteenth contemplation — “merely forming the image of an image of the Buddha obtains measureless merit; how much more contemplating the Buddha in the fullness of his bodily marks.” The two places are of one type, and yet what is being argued is not the same thing: there it runs from a small image up to the true body, here from hearing the name up to holding it in mind. Set the two sentences side by side and you will see that the sūtra keeps doing one and the same thing — first it writes down the lowest rung, and then says that the higher is still above.

A course of work as long as the sixteen contemplations is here set into a very wide stair: those who can make the contemplation make it; those who cannot hear the name; and those who have heard the name hold it in mind. When the sixteen contemplations have been taught, the sūtra lets the stair all the way down to the hearing of a name; read down along it, nobody is shut outside the door.

The Sūtra Gives One Who Recollects the Buddha a Name

There follows the weightiest judgment in the whole sūtra upon the person who recollects the Buddha:

“If there be one who recollects the Buddha, know that this person is the fentuoli flower among men.”

The fentuoli is the finest among flowers. The commentators of old gloss its other names one by one: the finest flower among men, the rare flower, the highest of the high flower among men, the wondrously fine flower among men. And then they turn these names at once upon the person: one who recollects the Buddha is the finest man among men, the wondrously fine man among men, the highest of the high among men, the rare man among men, the most excellent man among men.

Then the sūtra gives him two companions: “The Bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara and the Bodhisattva Mahāsthāmaprāpta are his excellent friends.”

The two great beings on whose description the tenth and eleventh contemplations spent so many words become, here, the friends of the person who recollects the Buddha.

What Is Entrusted Is a Name

At the last, the Buddha calls Ānanda by name once, alone.

The Buddha told Ānanda: “Hold these words well. One who holds these words holds the name of the Buddha of Measureless Life.”

“These words” means everything that has been said before. And the Buddha does not stop at remember these words well; he says one sentence more: to hold these words is to hold the name of the Buddha of Measureless Life.

A sūtra that teaches the forming of images entrusts, at the last, a name.

Two Assembly Halls

The sūtra is not yet finished.

“At that time the World-Honored One, his feet stepping through empty space, returned to Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa.” The Buddha goes back from the palace to the mountain — in the introduction he had vanished from Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa and appeared in the palace, and now he goes back by the same road.

“At that time Ānanda expounded at length for the great assembly the matters set out above.” At the assembly in the palace those present were Vaidehī, the five hundred attendant women, Maudgalyāyana and Ānanda, and the measureless gods listening from the air; the great assembly on the mountain had not heard it. And so Ānanda expounded all these matters for that assembly a second time.

That we can read this sūtra today rests precisely on that one sentence.

The readings handed down set down a further note here: why did the Buddha not simply dismiss the assembly, instead of stepping through empty space back to the mountain? It is said to have been in order to increase the reverence of the assembly, and also to conform to what he himself had said before. A sūtra spoken in a closed chamber is at the last carried back to the open assembly, and only then does it become a sūtra that can be transmitted.

The copy in your hands today has come by exactly such a road: spoken in a palace for one person, and then, on a mountain, told over again by one person for everyone.

“Measureless humans, gods, nāgas, spirits, and yakṣas heard what the Buddha said, all rejoiced greatly, paid homage to the Buddha, and withdrew.”

Looking back from here, the words “heard what the Buddha said” appear three times in this passage: Vaidehī and the five hundred attendant women heard what the Buddha said and obtained the benefit; Maudgalyāyana, Ānanda, Vaidehī and the rest heard what the Buddha said and rejoiced; humans, gods, nāgas, spirits, and yakṣas heard what the Buddha said, rejoiced, and paid homage. One and the same expression, three times over, stitches the closed chamber of the palace and the open assembly on Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa into one place.

The commentators of old also take that last word, “rejoiced,” and open it into three senses: the one able to expound is pure — the Buddha’s unobstructed wisdom has no error; the Dharma expounded is pure — it can bring sentient beings to realize the samādhi; and the fruit obtained by relying on the Dharma is pure — cultivation according to the Dharma being fulfilled, the body realizes a pure fruit. The rejoicing is not a courtesy at the breaking up of the assembly; it is the sign that three kinds of purity have all arrived together.

Carrying Forward — Two Eyes on the Same Sentence of Entrusting

The above is the meaning of this passage of the sūtra itself. Below, two eyes, one of the Sui and one of the Tang, cast their light from the side — the mirror is not the sūtra; only the same sentence, “one who holds these words holds the name of the Buddha of Measureless Life,” seen through two ways of reading.

The Shandao line is the reading of the Commentary on the Contemplation Sūtra in Four Fascicles. He divides the whole sūtra into five sections and sets up the benefit obtained as a section of its own, which is one of the places where he differs from the other houses. Among the seven sentences of the transmission at the palace, at the fifth, “if there be one who recollects the Buddha,” he marks out that it “directly shows that the power of the samādhi of recollecting the Buddha is beyond compare, and that the mixed goods are truly not of a kind to be set beside it”; he glosses the four names of fentuoli one by one and turns them into five names for the person who recollects the Buddha; and he says that for one who recollects the name of Amitābha with single devotion, Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta constantly follow him like his shadow and guard him, as close kin and friends do. At the sixth sentence he explains the entrusting as “directly clarifying the entrusting of the name of Amitābha, to be transmitted to distant ages,” and then lets fall the sentence to which later ages have most attached themselves:

“Although the benefit of the two gates, concentration and scattering, has been spoken of above, if one looks to the Buddha’s original vow, its intent lies in sentient beings uttering the name of Amitābha with single devotion.”

This sentence answers, head to tail, what he said at the highest birth of the lowest grade: “Yet if one looks to the intent of the Buddha’s vow, it only urges the uttering of the Name in right mindfulness, the meaning being that birth in that land comes swiftly thereby.” One stands at the end of the main body, the other at the end of the section on transmission.

The Zhiyi line is the reading of the Commentary on the Sūtra on Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life. He opens the transmission at the palace into four matters: setting out the names and teaching him to hold it, urging people to uphold and trust, entrusting and charging him to hold it, and hearing the Dharma and rejoicing. In glossing the name of the sūtra he cites it as “named Contemplating Ultimate Bliss, the Buddha of Measureless Life, Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta; also named Pure Karma and Birth Before All Buddhas,” and later in his text as “also named Contemplating the Buddha of Measureless Life, and also named Extinguishing and Removing the Obstruction of Karma” — what he cites differs slightly in its characters from the text current today. Of “he will sit at the site of the way” he says: the place where the way is obtained is called the site of the way; the way is obtained beneath the tree of awakening, and therefore it is called sitting. Nor does he let the words “all rejoiced greatly” pass: he gives three senses — the one able to expound is pure, the Dharma expounded is pure, and the fruit obtained by relying on the Dharma is pure. As for why the Buddha had to step through empty space back to Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa, he says it was “in order to increase the reverence of beings and to conform to what he himself had said, and therefore he manifests this change.”

One line reads that last sentence as the entrusting of the Name; the other reads that last section as the account of how a sūtra is handed on.

And the sūtra itself has said only this: one who holds these words holds the name of the Buddha of Measureless Life.

Translator · 釋慧鏡 Shi Huijing — with AI-assisted consistency checking

License · CC BY-NC-SA 4.0